JP2020005722A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine has the total time comprising a basic variation time of a special symbol in which a variation display time of the special symbol is specified by a main variation pattern and a variation addition time of the special symbol that is specified by a main variation addition pattern. A plurality of types of ready-to-win performance selection candidates are associated with a predetermined main variation pattern, and one of the special performances having a plurality of types of display modes can be executed according to the type of the main variation addition pattern. A ready-to-win performance corresponding to the display mode of the special performance can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

  Generally, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number for lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and temporarily stores the random number as an operation reserve ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Such operation-holding balls are sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a determination is made as to whether or not the ball corresponds to a big hit. If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of a plurality of columns is displayed in a variable manner, and then the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) to be set is established.

  As a pachinko gaming machine of this type, there is known a pachinko gaming machine having a large number of fluctuation patterns in order to increase variations such as a reach effect and a pseudo continuous effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-230714 A

  Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is required to further enhance the interest of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a game board having a game area formed therein, a start port provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and Random number obtaining means for obtaining a predetermined random number value in response to the entry of a game ball, and a right / wrong determination means for performing a right / wrong determination based on a random number value of the predetermined random number value obtained by the random number obtaining means A variation pattern determination unit that performs a main variation pattern lottery to determine a main variation pattern based on the main variation pattern random number value of the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit; Based on the main variation pattern, a symbol display device in which a special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment is changed and stopped and displayed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit In the case, a special game execution means capable of shifting to a special game advantageous to the player, an effect display device in which a predetermined effect is displayed, and an effect determination means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device, Based on the random number value of the main variation addition pattern among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means, a main variation addition pattern lottery for determining the main variation addition pattern is performed, and the basic variation time of the special symbol is determined by the main variation pattern. Is specified, the fluctuation addition time of the special symbol is specified by the main fluctuation addition pattern, and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is specified by the basic fluctuation time and the main fluctuation addition pattern of the special symbol specified by the main fluctuation pattern. Is configured to be a total time with the change addition time of the special symbol, A plurality of types of reach effect selection candidates are associated with the variation pattern, and any of special effects having a plurality of types of display modes can be executed according to the type of the main variation addition pattern. And a reach effect corresponding to the display mode of the special effect can be executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and an effect control board of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows a game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows a fluctuation pattern selection state table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 4. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table 5; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table 6; It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of a fluctuation addition effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a main fluctuation pattern, a main fluctuation addition table, and a main fluctuation addition pattern. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram for explaining a main variation addition pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation pattern table (for outliers). It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation pattern table (for big hits). It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation addition pattern table (for outlier 1). It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation addition pattern table (for outlier 2). It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation addition pattern table (1 for big hits). It is a schematic diagram which shows a sub fluctuation addition pattern table (for big hits 2). It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of a fluctuation addition effect. (A) is a schematic diagram of a companion participation effect pattern table, (B) is a schematic diagram of an aura-connected effect pattern table, and (C) is a schematic diagram of an aura-use effect pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of an associate participation production and an aura connection production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of an aura use effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of a pseudo continuous fanning effect. It is a mimetic diagram used for explaining other characteristic composition 1 of a change addition effect. It is a mimetic diagram used for explaining other characteristic composition 2 of a change addition effect. It is a mimetic diagram used for explanation of a suspended image display area and a changing image display area. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding | maintenance image of the normal mode, and the image during a change. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change look-ahead lottery table of the normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (first hold) of the normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (second hold) of the normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (hold 3rd) of the normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (fourth hold) of the normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold | maintenance image of the suppression chance mode and the image during a change. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change look-ahead lottery table of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the suspension change pattern table (first suspension) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (second hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (hold 3rd) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (fourth hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of the hold change effect of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of the effect of the special hold change effect of the suppression chance mode. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating a reserved image and a changing image in a normal mode according to a first modification. It is a schematic diagram which conceptually shows the layer structure of the effect display device of the modification 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect example of the hold change effect of the normal mode of the modification 1. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating a reserved image and a changing image in a normal mode according to a second modification. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating an operation display of a suspended image and a changing image in a normal mode according to a second modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect example of the hold change effect of the normal mode of the modification 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of a battle production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen of the battle effect, (B) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the internal value of the meter counter and the level of the meter image, and (C) is the timing of updating the meter and the upper limit of the internal numerical value. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence with a value. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation validity period of the production button of the fantasy fight rush mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of a suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the schematic diagram used for description of a base suppression effect table (progress pattern). It is a schematic diagram which shows the lottery table of a base suppression effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of a remaining number notification effect and a mode branching effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the time chart of a standby demonstration effect. It is a flowchart which shows a main control side main process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a control process of the main control-side main process, which is subsequent to FIG. 62. It is a flowchart which shows a main control side timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows winning monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flowchart which shows special electric auditors product control processing. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a control process of the special electric accessory control process following FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side timer interrupt processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an image control command transmission interruption process.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIGS. 1 and 2 show a front view and a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, with reference to these drawings, an overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be schematically described. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first-type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and a first game (a first special symbol game) and a second game are provided. A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic configuration of Pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as a “gaming machine PM”) has a vertically fixed holding frame having a size of an outer rectangular frame. A front frame 2 which is formed in a rectangular frame size and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached by a vertical hinge mechanism 3 disposed on the left edge of the front of each other so as to be able to open and close horizontally and to be detachable, and is attached to the right edge of the front. It is always kept in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

  A rectangular glass frame 5 fitted to the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable and closable using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 and is detachably attached. The front frame 2 is always kept in a closed state covering the front surface. A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and a game area PA on the front of the game board 20 is visibly faced through the multi-layer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. I have.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light in accordance with the development state of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect in accordance with the development state of the game are provided. Upper and lower bowls (upper bowl 8 and lower bowl 9) for storing game balls are provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect that is pressed by a player at the front center of the upper bowl 8 is provided. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for performing a shooting operation of a game ball is provided on the right front side of the lower ball tray 9. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”. The effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button-type switch, and an output corresponding to the direction of the operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) to perform, tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Such as a touch panel or any other operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed into a rectangular flat plate using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA on which game balls can roll. A guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position near the exit opening of the game ball (in the inner rail 42) in the guide passage. At the front end), a ball return preventing valve 43 for preventing a game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again is provided. In this game area PA, together with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various kinds of first starting port 51, second starting port 52, operating gate 53, large winning port 54, general winning ports 61, 62, 63, 64 and the like are provided. In addition to the winning opening, a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a general symbol reservation lamp 76, and the like. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center decoration 21.

  The game area PA has a left area PA1 that is a left area (a board area corresponding to left-handed) of the center decoration 21 and a right area (corresponds to right-handed) of the center decoration 21 with reference to the center decoration 21 in the substantially center. And the right side area PA2). On the upper part of the center decoration 21, a top plate portion 22 that is substantially vertically opposed to the outer rail 41 is integrally formed, and extends between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A communication passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right area PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, a game ball flowing down the left area PA1 can enter the first starting port 51 or any of the general winning ports 61 to 63 disposed mainly below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can be mainly entered into any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the special winning opening 54 arranged to the right of the center decoration 21. It is. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 29 for discharging game balls that have rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a normally open prize port that is opened upward, and mainly allows game balls (left-handed game balls) flowing down the left area PA1 to enter. Entering a game ball into the first starting port 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, a special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a “first special symbol”.

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 51 is disposed in a right area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to a right hit, and allows a game ball flowing down the right area PA2 (a right-hit game ball) to enter. Entering a game ball into the second starting port 52 is a trigger for a second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, a special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a “second special symbol”. The second starting port 52 includes a normal electric accessory 522 generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 523 for driving the normal electric accessory 522 to open and close. The ordinary electric accessory 522 changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second starting port 52. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which a game ball is unlikely to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a later-described predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering a game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a movable member 524 of a front-back slide type for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and a closed position (projecting position) where the second starting port 52 is opened to allow a game ball to enter. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the board surface) between an easily opened position (retreat position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of at least about one game ball in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from right to left in front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and the right and left sides of the guide path can be moved from right to left. And falls down from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

  The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is a trigger for ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting port 52 is to be opened.

  The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the winning or losing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 includes a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric accessory 542 changes between an open state in which game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter or difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In this example, the special winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 of the game area PA. Therefore, in a special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is fired, hitting the right area PA2, that is, so-called right hit makes it easy to enter the big winning opening 54. Has become.

  The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in a left area PA1 which is a board area corresponding to left hitting, and game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can enter. The general winning ports 61 to 63 include a left general winning port switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like. Entering a ball can be detected.

  The general winning opening 64 is provided in a right area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to a right hit, and a game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of game balls into the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not serve as a trigger for a lottery of a special symbol or a normal symbol. However, like other winning ports (except for the operation gate 53), a trigger for acquiring a winning ball. Becomes

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs a change display and a fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed in accordance with the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs a change display and a fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 includes, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are indicated by lighting / flashing of the lamps. (Up to four each). The number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 51 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. The number indicates that the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the number of times the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. Similarly, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol is calculated based on the random number obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. The number indicates that the obtained random number value is suspended, that is, the number of times the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random number value. I have.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and final display of the normal symbol. The ordinary figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the lighting number of the lamp corresponds to the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations held (the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations that have not been executed yet). In addition, on the left side of the ordinary symbol display device 75, a round display 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special motor-operated object 542 operates continuously) is provided. ing.

  The effect display device 70 mainly includes a change effect of a decorative design to be displayed in a variable manner and a stop display in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect including a preview effect of suggesting or notifying an expectation of a big hit in advance. An image is displayed, and a hold display corresponding to the operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. More specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 on which a variation display of a decorative symbol, a notice effect display, and the like are executed, a first special figure holding lamp 73, and a second special figure holding lamp 74. A suspended image display area 710 in which the reserved images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the variable image display area 720 in which a variable image corresponding to the variable display is displayed is provided. I have. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display unit 700, a three-line display area (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) serving as a variable display area of a decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) Is provided, and the right side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol display area Z1 and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle symbol display area Z2 and the right symbol corresponding to the right symbol display area Z3. Each of the symbols is stopped and displayed. The reserved image display unit 710 displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the first reserved special operation ball and a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the second special symbol activated reserved ball. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of generation of the special reserved actuation reserved balls (the order of entry), and a maximum of four reserved images for the first special symbol and a maximum of four reserved images for the second special symbol. Display is possible. In addition, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (a changing icon) corresponding to the currently displayed changing display is displayed.

  The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70 and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable role object 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development state of the game. The movable accessory 24 includes a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development state of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 having a window communicating with the front and rear at the center and having a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 as a base is provided. The front frame 2 is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so as to be openable and closable and detachable. On this back set board 30, a back set cover 30C having a rectangular box shape with an open front is detachably mounted, and is always disposed so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 has a storage tank 31 and a storage tank 3 for storing a large number of game balls.
A tank rail 32 extending with a gentle downward slope from 1 to the right, a ball supply passage 33 connected to the right end of the tank rail 32 and extending downward, and a prize for paying out game balls guided by the ball supply passage 33. A ball payout unit 34 and a prize ball passage 35 for guiding game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6 are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in general, a production control board 200 for controlling the overall production, an image display according to the game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing the above is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 for controlling the launch and payout of the game ball, and power supply from the game facility side to various control boards and electric power supply to electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, these control boards are respectively mounted at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. Will be arranged. These control boards and the electric and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable), so that the pachinko gaming machine PM is operable.

<Control structure of pachinko machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores a control program and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or a buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board and A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting a signal to / from a device is mounted. The main CPU 101 plays a game in accordance with a control program stored in a ROM 102. It is configured to execute main control relating to progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs away. A WDT circuit for returning to a normal state, a CTC circuit for enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and operating as a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number) A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 reads out various control programs stored in the ROM 102 based on detection information from each switch and performs arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processings relating to main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as a stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off. In), the state of the gaming machine is returned to the state before power-off based on the information of the backup area.

The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, the left general winning port switch 611, the right general winning port switch 641, and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general symbol reservation lamp. 76, and is electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Transmitted to display means and various solenoids. The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (a data display, a hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via the payout control board 300, for example.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200 cannot transmit data to the main control board 100, and cannot request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area serving as a temporary storage area, An effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 including a RAM 203 functioning as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 for inputting and outputting signals to and from peripheral boards and devices is mounted. The sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and that is reset when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away. WDT circuit for restoring to normal state, TPU circuit for outputting various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller for activating various interrupts such as timer interrupt based on signals from the TPU circuit, etc., and for inputting and outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 performs an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to give an image and a sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and an image control command relating to images and sounds is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and outputs a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. In synchronization with the clock signal, the ramp control signal is transmitted one bit at a time via the data line. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving an LED drive lamp control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off a switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, a control is performed to supply or cut off the drive current to the effect lamp LP and to turn on or off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by turning on / off a switch in the circuit based on the accessory control drive control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, control is performed to shut off and operate each movable accessory 24. The data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

  The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 for performing various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 storing an image control program and various data, and a work area serving as a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 including a RAM 303 functioning as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 for inputting and outputting signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image effects in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 generates a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301 and a VDP that generates image data based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301. And a sound source IC for generating sound data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in accordance with an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and processes the image data to transmit a video signal (image data) generated to the effect display device. The VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and controls the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out prize balls. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the firing mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the firing handle 12 to control the firing of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from a power supply facility on the game island, and a backup power supply. A power supply required for electronic and electric components such as control boards and game machines, comprising a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to voltage drop. Supply. A power switch for activating a power circuit is connected to the power board 500. Assuming that primary power is supplied from a power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board is turned off. A predetermined power is supplied to each control board and the like from the 500 normal power supply circuits. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off, and when a power supply is detected, outputs a power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) notifying the fact to the main control board 100. To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device of the gaming island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on is connected to the power supply board 500. ing. The RAM clear switch may be configured to be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

  The external information terminal plate 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signal that the external information terminal plate 600 outputs as external information to the external device outside the machine includes, for example, a jackpot signal, a signal during a consecutive game, a symbol determination signal, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal. , A disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection signal (such as an incoming ball passage time abnormality), and the like. In addition, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) relating to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful information for a player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer tallies the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and This is a device that manages the operation status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without using a data display.

<Basic operation of Pachinko machine>
The pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above is provided for a game with the outer frame 1 fixedly installed on the game island of the gaming facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, and the like being closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are sent out to the firing mechanism 14 one by one by a ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 launches the game in the game area PA. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right area PA2 and flows down the left area PA1. In the left area PA1, a left flow path for causing the game balls to flow toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning ports 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right area PA2 and flows down the right area PA2. In the right area PA2, a right flow path for causing the game balls to flow toward the operation gate 53, the general winning port 64, the second starting port 52, and the special winning port 54 is formed. In this manner, the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 or the right area PA2 are provided with the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operation gate 53 in accordance with the route distributed in the left area PA1 or the right area PA1. If the ball does not enter any of the winning ports 54 or any of the general winning ports 61 to 64, the ball will flow to the out port 29.

  When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters one of the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, the special winning port 54, and the general winning ports 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning port. The ball is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 51 is “4” and the second is the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters one of the winning ports (referred to as “unit prize ball number”). The starting port 52 is set to “1”, the general winning ports 61 to 64 are set to “3”, and the special winning port 54 is set to “15”. The unit prize ball number of each winning opening is not limited to the one exemplified in the present embodiment, and another unit prize ball number may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting port 51 is "4", the second starting port 52 is "3", the general winning ports 61 to 64 are "5", and the large winning port is "10". And so on.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a random number value of a special symbol is acquired and the random number value is temporarily stored as a special symbol operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined starting condition (special symbol change start condition described later) is satisfied, a special symbol hit / fail determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are performed on the random number value of the earliest operation-holding ball. In a manner according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The change display of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after a lapse of a change time according to the selected change pattern.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is definitely displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of the big hit game, an opening / closing operation of changing the big winning port 54 to the open state only once or a plurality of times is performed. When the specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 or when the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined big hit is won, the special symbol probability changing function may be activated from the end of the big hit game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined end number. When the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) occurs relatively early. Become. The special symbol probability changing function may be continued until the next big hit occurs. In addition, “10000 times” which is substantially equivalent to the number of times of variable display until the occurrence of the next big hit may be set as the predetermined number of final times.

  In addition, after the big hit game ends, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function may be operated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol probability changing function. When the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved. Easy acquisition).

  Further, after the big hit game is over, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as “electric sapo”) may be operated in conjunction with or independent of the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function. The electric-chu support function activates the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time reduction function, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522, thereby facilitating entry into the second starting port 52. This is the state (also referred to as the “ball entry state”). When the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the normal symbol win probability becomes higher than in the normal state. When the normal symbol fluctuation time reducing function is activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is reduced. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 becomes longer than in the normal state. In this easy ball entry state, the possibility that the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol per fixed time increases more than usual increases, and the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 52 also increases. The possibility that the number of entering balls increases will also increase. Therefore, the operation of the electric chew support function increases the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 during that period, so that the game can be continued with almost no decrease in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the “base”, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launched balls of game balls, increases. In the following, the state in which the electric tuner support function is operating is also referred to as “high base state”, and the state in which the electric tuner support function is not operating is also referred to as “low base state”.

<Main functions of Pachinko machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / the production control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determining unit 110, a game lottery random number generating unit 120, a holding control unit 130, a preliminary determining unit 135, a special symbol lottery processing unit 140, a normal symbol lottery processing unit 145, It includes special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, game state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are configured by hardware such as a main CPU 101, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

  The winning determination unit 110 determines each winning opening based on a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611, 641, and the like. Is determined to enter a game ball. When the first starting port switch 511 detects that a game ball has been entered, the entering ball judging means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “first starting port winning command”) indicating that. When the game ball is detected to be entered by the 2 start port switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as a “2nd start port winning command”) indicating this is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 detects the effect of the game ball. When passing is detected, an effect control command (referred to as an “operation gate winning command”) indicating that fact is generated, and when the entry of a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, this is indicated. When an effect control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated, and when a general winning opening switch 611, 641 detects the entry of a game ball, an effect control command ("general winning opening") indicating that is detected. Winning Generates a called Command "), temporarily stores this in the command storage area in the main information storage means 180.

  The game lottery random number generating means 120 is used for a special symbol winning / losing lottery by fetching a built-in random number generated by a random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to this. Generate random numbers per special symbol. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random number, a soft random number per special symbol to be added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to generate a hit random number, an initial value for a new update to be made after one cycle of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed Special initial value random number, special symbol stop symbol random number, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining an initial value for performing a new update after one cycle of the update is completed, a special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol, Special symbol variation addition pattern random number for use in selection of special symbol variation addition pattern, normal random number per symbol for use in normal symbol success / failure lottery Ordinary symbol initial value random number for determining initial value for new update after one cycle of updating of ordinary symbol random number is completed, ordinary symbol variation for use in selecting variation pattern of ordinary symbol Pattern random numbers are included. These software random numbers are updated once (increment, decrement, addition of a prime number, etc.) each time the timer interrupt processing occurs, and the initial random numbers are not updated during the timer interrupt processing ( (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

  The holding control means 130 includes a special symbol holding control means 131 and a normal symbol holding control means 132.

The special symbol holding control means 131 is a random number value per special symbol, a random number value per special symbol, which is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, when a game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52. A symbol random number value, a special symbol variation pattern random value, and a special symbol variation addition pattern random value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 combines the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (four) with the entering order of the holding balls in the main information storage means. 180 is temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area.

  The first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area have a hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), a hold 2 storage area (2 A third storage area (a third storage area), a third storage area (a third storage area), and a fourth storage area (a fourth storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, a special pattern change pattern random number, and a special pattern change addition pattern random number value as a set as the operation hold ball information. The operation pending sphere information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, the pending 4 storage. Digested in order of territory (first in first out principle). When the reserved sphere information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area are shifted to lower-numbered storage areas, respectively. The contents of the hold 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 includes a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special ball holding counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired as the update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation holding ball is consumed. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  Also, when the special symbol holding control means 131 updates (addition or subtraction) the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command (“symbol storage”) including the update information of the number of holding balls is updated. (Referred to as "number command") and temporarily store it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. It should be noted that, in principle, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation-holding ball relating to the second special symbol game is present, the operation-holding relating to the second special symbol game is performed regardless of the existence of the operation-holding ball relating to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. In addition, under this priority digestion, when the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is digested. Will be suspended.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132, when the game ball enters the operation gate 53, triggers a random number per lot for the normal symbol game, a random number per symbol, a symbol random value per symbol, and a symbol variation pattern. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-holding ball information of a normal symbol. The ordinary symbol holding control unit 132 stores the operation-holding ball information of the ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form in which the information is combined with a predetermined upper limit number (four) of the entering balls of the reserved symbols. Remember temporarily. Further, the ordinary symbol holding control means 132 has an ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter for counting the number of operation retaining balls of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 increments the corresponding counter by one each time one operation-holding ball of a normal symbol is acquired, and one operation-holding ball is digested as an update process of the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

The pre-judgment means 135 executes the pre-judgment for the pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball when the operation-holding ball of the special symbol is acquired at a predetermined pre-judgment timing. As an example of the above-described pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting, and when the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting, and Either one of the following cases: when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric-chu support function is operating, or (3) when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during a big hit or a small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed in accordance with the gaming machine specification (for example, a starting opening according to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric accessory is normally reserved for eight pieces. (1) may be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc. in a model in which is stored, or a specification in which a preliminary determination is always performed without providing a preliminary determination timing. Good. In addition, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the main player of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the object of the preliminary determination. In the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is a target of the preliminary determination. More specifically, the preliminary determination unit 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation-holding ball acquired this time from the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and The preliminary determination (priority determination of hit / fail), the preliminary determination of the symbol (preliminary symbol determination), and the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern preliminary determination) are sequentially performed. The preliminary determination table used in each preliminary determination is not shown, but an area corresponding to the total number of random numbers is divided into a plurality of areas in each of the hit / fail preliminary determination table, the symbol preliminary determination table, and the variation pattern preliminary determination table. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as “prior determination number”)) is assigned to each area (determination number). For this reason, the result of the preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the winning / failing determination, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the fluctuation pattern determination). It should be noted that the pass / fail judgment table and the symbol pre-judgment table may be the same as the pass / fail lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when actually starting to change. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table includes the game situation at the start of the fluctuation (whether there is a probable change, whether there is a shortened time, whether it is during the limited frequency period which is a period for referring to the special fluctuation pattern table, the number of reserved balls, etc.). Is likely to change, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included as described above. Further, as a modified example, the random number value in a register or the like on the main CPU 101 temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area is determined in advance. May be. Then, the preliminary determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as “preliminary determination command”) including information on the result of the preliminary determination (prior determination number), and sequentially generates this command in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. To be stored.

  The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol hit / fail determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol change pattern determination unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140 stores the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main information storage means 180 in the first storage area (reservation 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area when the change start condition is satisfied. The stored random number value per special symbol, symbol random number value per special symbol, special symbol variation pattern random number value, special symbol variation addition pattern random number value are read out and stored in the special symbol hit / fail judgment area of the main information storage means 180, the special symbol. The information is stored in the symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area. Here, "the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the big hit is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the change standby state, (A3) This is when all the conditions of 1) the existence of the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol are satisfied. Also, "the change start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the big hit is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the change standby state, (B3) This is when all the conditions of the existence of the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol are satisfied. When the change start condition of the first special symbol and the change start condition of the second special symbol are simultaneously satisfied, the change start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed based on the priority digestion. I do.

The special symbol hit determination unit 141 reads out a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol hit determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and executes a hit determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss. Decide what to do. The result of the success / failure determination is temporarily stored in a special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 (for example, the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, and the outlier data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol win / fail determination means 141 holds a special symbol win / fail lottery table which is referred to at the time of this win / fail determination.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. FIG. 5A is referred to in a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated (low probability state), and FIG. 5B is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability). State). The special symbol win / fail lottery table associates the random number range of the random number value per special symbol with the result (big hit / miss) of the special symbol win / fail determination. As shown in FIG. 5, in the game state (low-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated in the special symbol win / fail determination, the random number per special symbol falls in the range of “0 to 204”. In the gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating, the special symbol is a big hit if the random number per special symbol falls in the range of “0 to 1506”. That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big hit is changed from “1 / 319.69” having a low probability to “1 / 43.49” having a high probability. As described above, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set to be equal in the first special symbol hit determination and the second special symbol hit determination. In the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as a result of the special symbol hit determination, but "small hit" may be set as a result of the special symbol hit determination. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142, the first special symbol large hit symbol table and the second special symbol big hit symbol table which is referred to when determining the big hit symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It has a special symbol big hit symbol table. In the present embodiment, “special jackpot” means a jackpot (probably variable jackpot) that triggers the probability change function of a special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and “normal jackpot” means a special symbol after the jackpot game ends. Means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the probability variation function of. In the present embodiment, when a specific jackpot is won, the special symbol probability variation function is activated after the end of the jackpot game and is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the “special jackpot” or the “normal jackpot” is won, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit game is played. Starting from the end, the display of the special symbol is continued until the number of times of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 100 times) or until the next big hit occurs.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol. Each of them is associated with one another (in this example, illustration of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, eight types of big hit types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as 8 types of jackpot types (symbol group), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C), and 4R Special jackpot 4 (symbol group D), 4R big hit 5 (symbol group E), 4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group F), 4R normal big hit 2 (symbol group G), 4R normal big hit 3 (symbol group H) ). For the 4R specific jackpots 1 to 5, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is “4 rounds”, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is “28 seconds”. For the 4R regular jackpots 1 to 3, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is “4 rounds”, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is “28 seconds”.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In the second special symbol big hit symbol table, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set with respect to the symbol random number per special symbol. Each of them is associated with one another (in this example, illustration of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol big hit table, three types of big hit types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as three types of jackpots (symbol group), they are sorted into 16R specific jackpots 1 (symbol group I), 16R specific jackpots 2 (symbol group J), and 2R regular jackpots (symbol group K). . For the 16R specific jackpots 1 and 2, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is “16 rounds”, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is “28 seconds”. In the 2R normal big hit, the prescribed round number of the big hit game is “2 rounds”, and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is “3 seconds”.

  Among the various jackpot types, “4R specific jackpots 1 to 5”, “4R ordinary jackpots 1 to 3”, and “16R specific jackpots 1 and 2” have the long winning opening 54 in all round games during the jackpot game. This is a jackpot type that triggers execution of a round game that opens for a time (28 seconds) (also referred to as a “long open round game”). On the other hand, the “2R normal big hit” is an opportunity to execute a round game (also referred to as a “short opening round game”) in which the special winning opening 54 is opened for a short time (3 seconds) in all round games during the big hit game. It is a big hit type. In the present embodiment, in the long opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is such that a game ball of a specified count (full count = 10 balls) can enter or easily enter the special winning opening 54. Is a round game set to. In the short opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is a round in which game balls of a specified count (full count = 10 balls) are set to be impossible to enter or difficult to enter in the special winning opening 54. It is a game. Therefore, the expected value of winning a prize ball in the big hit game increases in the order of “2R normal big hit” <“4R specific big hit 1-5”, “4R normal big hit 1-3” <“16R specific big hit 1,2”.

  Subsequently, a gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent game state, and a probability change game state are set as a plurality of kinds of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as a “probable change state” or a “probable change game state”, 2) A game state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated and the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are not activated is called a "latent play state" or a "latent state". (3) Special The game state in which the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated without the symbol probability variation function being activated is referred to as the "time reduction state" or "time reduction game state", and (4) all functions are activated. A state in which the game is not performed is referred to as a “normal state” or a “normal game state”. Here, it can be said that the “probable change game state”, the “probable game state”, and the “time saving game state” are all advantageous game states for the player compared to the “normal game state”. Therefore, in the following, the probable game state, the latent game state, and the time-saving game state are also referred to as advantageous game states, as the game states having higher advantages for the player than the normal game state.

Each game state is determined by a combination of an operation state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and an operation state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) Probable change game state is “high probability high base state”, (2) latent game state is “high probability low base state”, (3) time saving game state is “low probability high base state”, (4) normal game state Can be expressed as a “low probability low base state”. At this time, the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function is in a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol which is the main player of the game in at least the gaming state among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol change time reducing function is activated, at least in the first special symbol change time (in the normal game state) where the change display of the first special symbol is the main game. The average fluctuation time is shortened, and in the game state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main game (probable change game state, latent probability game state, time saving game state), at least the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average fluctuation) Time).

  FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the present embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each big hit type (type of symbol group), the number of times the special symbol probability changing function and the changing time shortening function (electric chew support function) are activated after the big hit game is completed is set. ing. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (1) a big hit type (a type of a symbol group), and (2) a game at the time of the big hit winning. It is determined according to the state. The number of times each game state is continued (the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated) is the number of times the special symbol probability variation function is activated (referred to as the “probability variation frequency”) and the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated. It is set according to the number of times (referred to as “variable time reduction number”) and the number of times that the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as “electrical support number”). In this embodiment, since the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function start operating at the same time and end the operation at the same time, the “variation time reduction number” and the “electric support number” are the same. This is the number of times (for this reason, the description of the “number of times of electric support operation” is omitted in FIG. 8).

(4R specific jackpot 1)
When the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state, the number of times of probability fluctuation is "10000 times" and the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "20" Times "and the number of times of electric support" 20 times "are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This certain change game state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 20 or until the next big hit occurs within the 20 times. When the certain symbol game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches 20 times, a transition from the next special symbol change display to the latent certain game state is made. Also, when the first special symbol “4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)” is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the time saving game state, the latent probable game state, or the probable change game state, the probability change frequency “10000 times”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “10000 times”, and the number of electric support “10000 times” are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. In this probable changing game state, an enormous number of "10000 times" is set as the number of times of continuation (the number of times of change in probability, the number of times of change in time of change, and the number of times of electric support). Is almost impossible to occur stochastically (to win at about 1/44), and thus continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 2)
When the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group B)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state, the number of times of probability fluctuation is "10000 times" and the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "40" Times "and the number of times of electric support" 40 times "are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This certain change game state is continued until the number of times of display of the special symbol changes reaches 40 or until the next big hit occurs within this 40 times. When the certain symbol game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches 40 times, a transition from the next special symbol change display to the latent certain game state is made. Also, when the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group B)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the time saving game state, the latent probable game state, or the probable change game state, the probability change frequency “10000 times”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “10000 times”, and the number of electric support “10000 times” are set, and the certain-variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 3)
When the first special symbol “4R specific big hit 3 (symbol group C)” is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state, the number of times of probability fluctuation is “10000 times” and the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is “60”. Times "and the number of times of electric support" 60 times "are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This certain change game state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 60 or until the next big hit occurs within this 60 times. If the certain symbol game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches 60 times, the next special symbol change display is shifted to the latent game mode. Also, when the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 3 (symbol group C)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the time saving game state, the latent probable game state, or the probable change game state, the probability change frequency “10000 times”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “10000 times”, and the number of electric support “10000 times” are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R special jackpot 4)
When the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 4 (symbol group D)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the probability change frequency "10000 times", the fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", The number of support times “10000” is set, and a certain-variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 5)
When the first special symbol "4R specific big hit 5 (symbol group E)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the probability change frequency "10000 times", the fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", The number of support times “10000” is set, and the certain-variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(4R regular big hit 1)
When the first special symbol "4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group F)" is won, if the game state at the time of the big hit win is the normal game state or the latent game state, the probability change frequency is "0", the fluctuation The number of times of time reduction “20 times” and the number of electric support “20 times” are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 20 or until the next big hit occurs within the 20 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches 20 times, the transition from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state is made. Also, when the first special symbol “4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group F)” is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the probable change gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the probability fluctuation frequency is “0 times”, The number of times of fluctuation time reduction “100” and the number of electric support “100” are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state is made.

(4R regular big hit 2)
When the first special symbol "4R normal big hit 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state or the latent game state, the probability fluctuation frequency is "0", the fluctuation is performed. The number of times of time reduction "40 times" and the number of electric support "40 times" are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times of display of the special symbol has reached 40 or until the next big hit occurs within this 40 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 40 times, the normal game state is shifted from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state. Also, when the first special symbol "4R normal big hit 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the probable changing gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the probability fluctuation frequency is "0 times", The number of times of fluctuation time reduction “100” and the number of electric support “100” are set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state is made.

(4R regular big hit 3)
When the first special symbol “4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group H)” is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state or the latent game state, the probability fluctuation frequency is “0”, the fluctuation is performed. The number of time reductions “60” and the number of electric support “60” are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches 60 or until the next big hit occurs within this 60 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 60 times, the transition from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state is made. Also, when the first special symbol “4R normal big hit 3 (symbol group H)” is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the probable changing gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the probability fluctuation frequency is “0 times”, The number of times of fluctuation time reduction “100” and the number of electric support “100” are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state is made.

(16R specific jackpot 1)
When the second special symbol "16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the probability change frequency "10000 times", the fluctuation time reduction frequency "10000 times", The number of support times “10000” is set, and a certain-variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(16R specific jackpot 2)
In the case of winning the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability change frequency "10000 times", the fluctuation time shortening frequency "10000 times", The number of support times “10000” is set, and a certain-variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

(2R regular big hit)
When the second special symbol "2R normal big hit (symbol group K)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the probability fluctuation frequency is "0", the fluctuation time reduction frequency is "100", the electric support The number of times “100” is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state is made.

The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 determines a variation pattern of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a “main variation pattern”) based on the random number value of the special symbol variation pattern. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a main variation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of main variation patterns. In each drawing, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is described, but in actuality, a judgment value (range of random number values) for determining a main fluctuation pattern according to a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is shown. The main fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value belongs to.

  In the present embodiment, the execution time (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display is constituted by the total time of the “basic fluctuation time” and the “fluctuation addition time”. The “basic fluctuation time” is specified based on the type of the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol. The “fluctuation addition time” is specified based on the type of a fluctuation addition pattern (also referred to as a “main fluctuation addition pattern”) of a special symbol described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol means a total time obtained by adding the “variation additional time” specified by the main fluctuation addition pattern to the “basic fluctuation time” specified by the main fluctuation pattern. I do.

  Here, the above-described variation pattern selection state will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating a variation pattern selection state table according to the present embodiment. The change pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a change pattern (change pattern table) of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, “selection state 1”, “selection state 2”, “selection state 3”, “selection state 4”, “selection state 5”, and “selection state 6” are available as six types of variation pattern selection states. Is set.

  The selection state 1 is a fluctuation pattern selection state set corresponding to the normal game state or the latent game state. The selection state 1 is set in response to the variable display when the currently running effect mode is the “normal mode” or the “special mode” described later.

  The selection states 2 to 4 are change pattern selection states set corresponding to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state. The selected state 2 is a variable display other than the branch game when the currently executed effect mode is the “suppression chance mode” described later (1st to 19th rotation, 21 to 39 rotation, 41 to 59 rotation). , From the 61st rotation to the next big hit). The selection states 3 and 4 are set corresponding to the fluctuation display (20th rotation, 40th rotation, and 60th rotation) of the branch game when the currently executed effect mode is the “suppression chance mode” described later. . Here, the selection state 3 corresponds to a branch game in which the suppression chance mode continues, and the selection state 4 corresponds to a branch game in which the suppression chance mode ends.

  The selection state 5 is a fluctuation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the probability change game state. The selection state 5 is set in accordance with the variable display when the currently executed effect mode is the “illusion rush mode” described later.

  The selection state 6 is a fluctuation pattern selection state set corresponding to the time saving game state. The selection state 6 is set in accordance with the variable display when the currently executed effect mode is the “revenge mode” described later.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special pattern variation pattern table has different reference columns for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and obtains the same special symbol variation pattern random value. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of the operation holding balls described in each figure (“0 holding”, “1 to 2 holdings”, “3 holdings”) is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, It means the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-reserved balls after reservation and digestion), and in the case of a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (after reservation and digestion) (The number of operation reserve balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of the lottery of the change pattern (at the start of the change display / after the holding display) (excluding the operation-holding ball digested by the change display). . In addition, as a modified example thereof, a total value of the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. Also, during the limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, particularly a period in which the fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state is selected), the first special symbol, Irrespective of the second special symbol, the variation pattern lottery may be performed using a common table. In that case, it is particularly desirable to use the common table when selecting the variation pattern of the loss, When the change pattern of the big hit is selected, since the type of the special game that can be executed may be different depending on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a common variation pattern corresponding to the type of the special game is selected. It is desirable not to use a table.

  The fluctuation effect of the decoration symbol performed in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the like. FIGS. 10 to 15 also show the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (variation time) for reference. In the figure, "Super shortened fluctuation", "Shortened fluctuation", and "Normal fluctuation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in three rows fluctuate, and do not go through the reach state at all, and become "out of shape" at the so-called breakaway. It is. Hereinafter, the super-shortened fluctuation, the shortened fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as “non-reach loss”. The non-reach deviations differ from each other in that the fluctuation display is stopped in a shorter time in the shortened fluctuation than in the normal fluctuation and in the ultra-shortened fluctuation than in the shortened fluctuation.

  “N-reach (normal reach)” is a state where the same decorative pattern is stopped in two rows (generally the left and right rows) of three decorative patterns (reach state), and the remaining one row (common) In this example, the reach effect is “missing” when a different decorative pattern is stopped in the middle row (in the middle row), and is “big hit” when the same decorative pattern is stopped in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row). In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of N reach is not set, but the variation pattern of N reach may be set as a matter of course.

“SP Reach (Super Reach)” is a reach production that has a relatively high expectation of big hits compared to the N reach described above, and develops from N reach and displays still images and moving images such as animations and live-actions Reach production. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to D are prepared as types of SP reach. SP reach A to C is a reach effect executed when the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode or the special mode. “SP reach A” is a reach effect in which two main characters (one ally character and one friend character) appear. “SP reach B” is a reach effect in which three main characters (one ally character and two fellow characters) appear. “SP reach C” is a reach effect in which four main characters (one ally character and three fellow characters) appear. The SP reaches A to C are SP reaches that can be selected when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is “big hit” when the currently executed effect mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In the present embodiment, the order of “SP reach A” <“SP reach B” <“SP reach C” indicates that the big hit expectation is higher. In other words, the SP reach (SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C) in which the number of appearances of the main characters (companion characters) is large indicates that the big hit expectation degree is high. If a friend character appears in the below-described friend participation production performed before the development to the SP reach A to C, it is assured that the friend character appearing in this friend participation production also appears in the SP reach. In other words, of the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters that appeared in the fellow participation production also appear in SP Reach A to C (the number of appearances of the fellow characters in the fellow participation production ≦ the fellow characters in the SP reach production). Appearances). Therefore, the number of appearances of the fellow characters in the friend participation performance guarantees the minimum number of appearances of the fellow characters in the SP reach, and the occurrence of SP reach of a type or more corresponding to the minimum number is guaranteed. . For example, if two fellow characters appear in a special performance of a friend participation battle (one of the effects newly added during the change), if the friend participation production is performed and the player reaches SP reach, It is assured that the number of characters appearing is two or more (the number of main characters appearing is three or more), that is, SP reach B or more (SP reach B or SP reach C). As a modified example, it is not necessary to be assured, and if a friend character appears in the friend participation production described later performed before developing to the SP reach A to C, the friend character appearing in this friend participation production becomes the SP reach. Is relatively high, that is, among the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters that appeared in the fellow participation performance are more likely to appear in SP reach A to C. For example, when two fellow characters appear in a friend-partitioning performance, if this player-participation effect is performed and the game reaches SP reach, the number of friend character appearances is two or more (the main character appears three people). Above), that is, specifications that are likely to evolve beyond SP reach B (SP reach B or SP reach C) It may be. In addition, the detailed content of the friend participation production will be described later. On the other hand, “SP reach D” is a reach effect that can be executed in any effect mode. This “SP reach D” is a battle reach in which a fellow character battles an enemy character. It should be noted that “SP reach D” is different from “SP reach A to C” and is selected only when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (when the result of the special symbol hit determination is incorrect). Is not selected). The details of SP reach D (battle reach) will be described later.

  In the “pseudo-ream”, the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed (simulated stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variably displayed during the single variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable symbol is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. (Pseudo continuous production, pseudo fluctuation production, pseudo continuous fluctuation production, re-variation production). The pseudo continuous production is a predetermined production (predetermined production) in which a pseudo fluctuation in which all three decorative symbols start to fluctuate or re-fluctuate and then temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped is executed a plurality of times. Hereinafter, the number of pseudo fluctuations is also referred to as “the number of pseudo runs”. In the fluctuation display in which the number of pseudo runs is two, the period from the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo fluctuation (referred to as “pseudo 1 fluctuation”). The period from the start of the re-variation to the final stop is the second pseudo-variation (referred to as “pseudo-two fluctuation”). In the fluctuation display in which the number of pseudo runs is three times, the period from the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo fluctuation (referred to as “pseudo 1 fluctuation”). The period from the start of the re-variation to the temporary stop is the second pseudo-change (referred to as “pseudo-two-variation”). This is the third pseudo fluctuation (referred to as “pseudo third fluctuation”). Note that, even in a fluctuation display that does not develop into a pseudo-run, for the sake of convenience of description, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the final determination may be referred to as the “first pseudo fluctuation” by imitating the first pseudo fluctuation. . This shows that the greater the number of pseudo runs, the higher the possibility of developing into SP reach with a high jackpot expectation. When the decorative symbols in the left and right columns of the three rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempai), the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. The big hit expectation is higher than the case. Further, when the decorative symbols in the left and right columns temporarily stop in the non-reach state or the reach state, the big hit expectation increases according to the type of the decorative symbols in the left column. As an example, the decorative patterns "1" and "5" have a higher jackpot expectation than the decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8", and the decorative patterns "1" and "5" The decorative symbol “3” has a higher expectation of a big hit, and the decorative symbol “7” has a higher expectation of a big hit than the decorative symbol “3”. The increase in the number of pseudo runs from the first run to the second run and from the second run to the third run is also referred to as “continuation of the pseudo run”.

The “pseudo-pumping” is an effect that stimulates whether or not to progress to the next pseudo-pump (second pseudo-pumping) during execution of the pseudo-pumping (first pseudo-pumping). The “pseudo-second sway” is an effect that stimulates whether or not to progress to the next simulated fluctuation (the third sway fluctuation) during execution of the simulated second fluctuation (the second simulated fluctuation). In the following, the “pseudo 1 fan” and the “pseudo 2 fan” may be collectively referred to as “pseudo continuous fan (pseudo continuous fan effect)”. In the pseudo continuous fanning effect, a predetermined pseudo continuous symbol (the details of the pseudo continuous symbol will be described later) as a middle symbol (final symbol) in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol of the three rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. ) Is a specific effect (specific effect) that fluctuates and is displayed near a predetermined temporary stop position and then whether or not the temporary stop is displayed. In the case where the next pseudo fluctuation is performed (when the pseudo continuous production is successful), the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily displayed at a predetermined temporary stop position, and when the next pseudo fluctuation is not performed (the pseudo continuous production is performed). In the case of failure), the pseudo continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped at the predetermined temporary stop position and other decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pseudo continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position. Only the symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner (for example, if the pattern is in a temporary state, SP reach is developed). Note that, in the present embodiment, before performing the pseudo continuous fanning (pseudo one fanning, pseudo two fanning), the pseudo continuous fanning of the gasse is performed in advance, as if the pseudo continuous fanning (pseudo one fanning, pseudo two fanning). There is a production that makes it look as if you redo (a production using the aura). The detailed contents of the aura use effect will be described later.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (3 seconds), PH1-2 (7 seconds), PH1-3 (10 seconds), PH1-4 (18 seconds), and PH1-5 (30) Second), PH1-6 (50 seconds), PH1-7 (40 seconds), PH1-8 (38 seconds), PH1-9 (58 seconds), PH1-10 (48 seconds), PH1-11 (60 seconds) , PH1-12 (80 seconds) and PH1-13 (70 seconds). When the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is "out", one of the main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-13 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, so that a different main variation pattern can be selected even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same. Specifically, as the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol increases, the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short is easily selected, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is increased. The smaller the number is, the easier it is to select a main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the variation time is relatively independent of the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. The main fluctuation pattern PH1-1 or PH1-2 which is set as short as possible is selected. As a modified example, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is correct is “out”, only the main variation pattern of the reduced variation is selected or the reduced variation is not dependent on the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol. A configuration in which the variation pattern can be most selected (preferably the same selection ratio regardless of the number of operation-reserved balls in the second special symbol) may be adopted. As a modification, the normal fluctuation may be divided into a normal fluctuation A (5 seconds) and a normal fluctuation B (7 seconds). In this case, for the first special symbol, when the hold is 0, the normal fluctuation B is selected. The shortening variation and the normal variation A may not be selected by setting the rate to 40% (the selection rates of PH1-4 to PH1-13 are the same as the selection rates in FIG. 10). At this time, the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation B are not selected by setting the selectivity of the normal fluctuation A to 40% (the selectivity of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selectivity in FIG. 10). It is preferable that the normal fluctuation A and the normal fluctuation B are not selected by setting the selectivity of the shortened fluctuation to 40% (the selectivity of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selectivity in FIG. 10). About 2 special designs Also selects a shortened variation only in either hold 0-3, or, it is desirable to select only normal variation B.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for the big hit, the main fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (30 seconds), PA1-2 (50 seconds), PA1-3 (40 seconds), PA1-4 (38 seconds), PA1-5 (58) Second), PA1-6 (48 seconds), PA1-7 (60 seconds), PA1-8 (80 seconds), PA1-9 (70 seconds), PA1-10 (110 seconds), PA1-11 (90 seconds) , PA1-12 (100 seconds), PA1-13 (120 seconds), and PA1-14 (120 seconds). When the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “big hit”, any one of the main fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 is selected without depending on the big hit type (specific big hit, normal big hit). You. That is, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "big hit", any of SP reach A to C is displayed in the variable display, as described in the "staging content" column in the figure. Is selected. Here, the basic fluctuation time of PA1-1 to PA1-9 is set to be the same as the basic fluctuation time of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for deviation, but an effect that does not appear at the time of deviation at the time of a big hit (example) As a result, a time obtained by adding 10 seconds to the basic variation time of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the variation pattern table 1 for the loss is PA1-1. It may be set to the basic fluctuation time of PA1-9, and when a big hit is made with a reversal effect (a simulated once-off effect, and then a surprising effect that informs the user of a big hit), instead of 10 seconds, It may be a time obtained by adding 15 seconds. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “big hit”, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main fluctuation pattern PA1-10 is selected and the big hit type is “specific big hit”. For example, the main fluctuation patterns PA1-11 to PA1-14 are selected. That is, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is "big hit", as described in the column of "effect contents" in the figure, the variation pattern that develops to battle reach in the variation display is displayed. Selected. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal mode, the effect mode is switched from the normal mode to the revenge mode (battle mode). The variation pattern PA1-110 to 1-14 selected when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination in the variation pattern table 1 (variation pattern table in the normal mode) is a big hit, and the variation pattern table 6 In the (revenge mode variation pattern table), the variation pattern PA6-1 to 6-5 selected when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a big hit is the same basic variation time (same effect content) Is associated with. In the present embodiment, selection of a main fluctuation pattern (SP reach D: victory) that can be selected when the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is a "big hit" and the big hit type is "specific big hit". Although the rate is set to the same probability (25%), a different selection rate may be set for each of the production routes 2 to 5 of SP reach D (battle production).

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 2 is referred to in the fluctuation display after the 1st to 19th rotation, the 21st to 39th rotation, the 41st to 59th rotation, and the 61st rotation in the suppression chance mode. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (1 second), PH2-2 (3 seconds), and PH2-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the outlier. When the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "out", the main variation pattern PH2-2 is independent of the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. Alternatively, PH2-3 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the determination of the second special symbol is “out”, the main fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-1
One of 2-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, and a different main variation pattern can be selected even if the special symbol variation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol, the more easily the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set relatively long. Note that, as a modification, for the first special symbol, only the normal variation may be selected (the selection rate is 100%) in any of the reservations 0 to 3, and for the second special symbol, When the reservation is 0, only the normal fluctuation is selected (selection rate is 100%). When the reservation is 1 to 2, only the shortened fluctuation is selected (the selection rate is 100%). You may make it select only a shortening fluctuation | variation (selection rate is 100%). In addition to the ultra-shortened fluctuation, the shortened fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation, the fluctuation (15 seconds) for performing an effect that does not result in the development to SP reach D as a fluctuation is at least a fluctuation of the second special symbol. In this case, the selectivity of the fluctuating change is uniformly 10% in any of the reservations 0 to 3, and the other 90% is the same as the distribution ratio of the selectivity in this figure. (For example, when the hold is 0, the shortened change is 18% and the normal change is 72%), or may be the same as the distribution ratio of the selectivity in the modified example (for example, the hold is When it is 0, normal fluctuation is selected at 90%). These modifications may also be applied to out-of-place variation pattern tables 5 and 6, which will be described later.

  The fluctuation pattern table 2 for the big hit includes main fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (110 seconds), PA2-2 (90 seconds), PA2-3 (100 seconds), PA2-4 (120 seconds), and PA2-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main change pattern PA2-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”, the main change pattern PA2-1 is selected. One of patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main variation pattern PA2-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”. , Any one of main fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5 is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 3 is referred to in the fluctuation display at the 20th, 40th, and 60th rotations of the suppression chance mode (however, only when the suppression chance mode is continued). The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (30 seconds) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for the loss. If the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "losing", the main variation pattern PH3-1 is not dependent on the number of operation pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. Selected. Similarly, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the main variation pattern PH3 is independent of the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. -1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game in the suppression chance mode) in which the variation pattern table 3 is referred to, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is successful is “losing”, the “suppression chance” is determined. The variation pattern PH3-1 in which the “mode continuous effect” is performed is selected. The “continuation of suppression chance mode effect” means that after the shutter effect (the door image changes from open to closed to open in almost the entire area of the screen), the currently executed effect mode (suppression chance mode) changes next time. This is an effect that notifies that the display will be continued after the display. In other words, the “suppression chance mode continuation effect” is an effect that stimulates whether or not the change display is the last change display in the suppression chance mode (high base state). The “suppression chance mode continuation effect” corresponds to a base branch effect described later (FIG. 56).

  The fluctuation pattern table 3 for the big hit includes the main fluctuation patterns PA3-1 (110 seconds), PA3-2 (90 seconds), PA3-3 (100 seconds), PA3-4 (120 seconds), and PA3-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. When the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”, the main fluctuation pattern is Any one of PA3-2 to PA3-5 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main variation pattern PA3-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”. , Any of main variation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-5 is selected. That is, the variation pattern table 3 for the big hit has substantially the same setting contents as the variation pattern table 2 for the big hit.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 4. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 4 is referred to in the fluctuation display at the 20th, 40th, and 60th rotations of the suppression chance mode (however, only when the suppression chance mode ends). The content of the variation pattern table 4 varies depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

  The main fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (30 seconds) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 4 for outliers. If the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "losing", the main variation pattern PH4-1 is not dependent on the number of operation pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. Selected. Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the main variation pattern PH4 does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. -1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game of the suppression chance mode) in which the variation pattern table 4 is referred to, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is “losing”, the “suppression chance” is displayed. The variation pattern PH4-1 in which the “mode end effect” is performed is selected. The “suppression chance mode end effect” means that the effect mode currently being executed (suppression chance mode) is changed after the shutter effect (the shutter image changes from open to closed to open in almost the entire area of the screen). This is an effect that informs that the process is to be ended. In other words, the “suppression chance mode end effect” is an effect that stimulates whether or not the change display is the last change display in the suppression chance mode (high base state). The “suppression chance mode end effect” corresponds to a base branch effect described later (FIG. 56).

  The fluctuation pattern table 4 for the big hit includes main fluctuation patterns PA4-1 (110 seconds), PA4-2 (90 seconds), PA4-3 (100 seconds), PA4-4 (120 seconds), and PA4-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the main change pattern PA4-1 is selected if the big hit type is "normal big hit", and if the big hit type is "specific big hit", the main change pattern PA4-1 is selected. One of patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main variation pattern PA4-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”. , Any of main variation patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 is selected. That is, the variation pattern table 4 for the big hit has substantially the same settings as the variation pattern tables 2 and 3 for the big hit.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 5. The contents of the variation pattern table 5 are different depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

  The main fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (1 second), PH5-2 (3 seconds), and PH5-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for outliers. When the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the main variation pattern PH5-2 does not depend on the number of operation pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. Alternatively, PH5-3 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “out”, any of the main variation patterns PH5-1 to PH5-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, so that even when the random number value of the special symbol variation pattern is the same, a different variation pattern can be selected. Specifically, as the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol is larger, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set relatively short is easily selected, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced. The smaller the number is, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set relatively long. Note that the variation pattern table for out-of-shift has substantially the same settings as the variation pattern table for out-of-shift 2 described above.

  The fluctuation pattern table 5 for the big hit includes main fluctuation patterns PA5-1 (110 seconds), PA5-2 (90 seconds), PA5-3 (100 seconds), PA5-4 (120 seconds), and PA5-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main change pattern PA5-1 is selected. If the big hit type is “specific big hit”, the main change pattern PA5-1 is selected. One of patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, the main variation pattern PA5-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”. , One of main variation patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5 is selected. The variation pattern table 5 for the big hit has substantially the same setting contents as the variation pattern table 2 for the big hit.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 6. The content of the variation pattern table 6 is different depending on the result of the hit determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (1 second), PH6-2 (3 seconds), and PH6-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 6 for outliers. When the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the variation pattern PH6-2 or the variation pattern PH6-2 does not depend on the number of operation pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. PH6-3 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is "out", any of the main variation patterns PH6-1 to PH6-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is correct is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, so that even when the random number value of the special symbol variation pattern is the same, a different variation pattern can be selected. Specifically, as the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set relatively short is easily selected, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. The smaller the number is, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set relatively long. Note that the variation pattern table 6 for out-of-shift has substantially the same settings as the above-described variation pattern tables 2 for out-of-shift.

  The fluctuation pattern table 6 for the big hit includes main fluctuation patterns PA6-1 (110 seconds), PA6-2 (90 seconds), PA6-3 (100 seconds), PA6-4 (120 seconds), and PA6-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the main change pattern PA6-1 is selected if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and if the big hit type is “specific big hit”, the main change pattern PA6-1 is selected. One of patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 is selected. Similarly, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main variation pattern PA6-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , Any of main variation patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 is selected. The change pattern table 6 for the big hit has substantially the same settings as the change pattern tables 2 and 5 for the big hit.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main fluctuation pattern of battle reach (SP reach D) is set in all the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 6. “Battle reach” is an SP reach in which a battle effect in which an ally character battles an enemy character to determine a win or loss is developed. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination as to whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is correct is “out”, the main variation pattern of the battle reach (SP reach D) is not selected, and the first special symbol is not selected. When the result of the hit determination of the symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit" (however, when the variation pattern table 1 is set, only when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is "big hit") ), The main variation pattern of battle reach is selected. Therefore, at the time when the game has developed into a battle reach during the execution of the fluctuation display (at the time when the battle effect is started), it is suggested to the player that the jackpot has been won. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is “big hit”, and when the big hit type is “special big hit”, the variation pattern in which the result of the battle effect is “win” Is selected, and if the big hit type is won as the “normal big hit”, the main fluctuation pattern in which the result of the battle effect is “defeat” is selected. Therefore, when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle effect during the execution of the fluctuation display, it is suggested to the player that the specific jackpot has been won (a jackpot which is an opportunity to shift to the certain-variable gaming state). On the other hand, if the ally character loses to the enemy character in the battle effect during the execution of the fluctuation display, it is suggested to the player that the normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a fall to the normal game state) is won.

  As described above, the basic pattern change time of the special symbol is defined for each of the main change patterns in the change pattern tables 1 to 6. However, even when any of the main change patterns is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol is determined. (Confirmation display time) is set to “0.5 seconds”. In addition, the special symbol confirmation stop time (confirmation display time) is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the present embodiment, the fluctuating time (basic fluctuating time, fluctuating additional time) and the definitive stopping time of the decorative symbol are also set in correspondence with the fluctuating time of the special symbol (basic fluctuating time, fluctuating additional time) and the definite stopping time. Have been.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern (main variation pattern) of the above-mentioned special symbol, and then refers to the main variation addition table associated with the selected main variation pattern to select a plurality of types. One main variation addition pattern is selected from the main variation addition patterns. This main variation addition pattern specifies an additional variation time (variation addition time) to be added to the basic variation time. In the present embodiment, as described above, the total time obtained by adding the “variation additional time” to the “basic variation time” is defined as the variation time of the special symbol (variation time = basic variation time + variation additional time). By suppressing the number of main fluctuation patterns, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the main control board 100 related to the main fluctuation pattern, by combining a plurality of types of main fluctuation addition patterns with one main fluctuation pattern, , A large number of main fluctuation patterns corresponding to the number of combinations can be created. In the present embodiment, the variable additional time is used as an effect scale (overall scale) of a special effect described later. The details of the main variation addition pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143, after selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation addition pattern, instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, so that the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. An effect control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not it is being performed, an effect control command including a main variation additional pattern (information for adding and subtracting variation time) (variation additional information designation command), a main variation pattern An effect control command (variable pattern designating command) including information, an effect control command (symbol designating command) including character effect number (symbol group and game state) information, and the like are generated (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as " This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. .

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145, when the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, reads out the random number per normal symbol and the random value of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, These are stored in the normal symbol hit / fail determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, the “normal symbol change start condition” means (1) that the normal symbol is in a change waiting state, and (2) that there is an operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (a state where the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The normal symbol hit determination unit 146 reads out a random number per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and performs a hit determination of the normal symbol, and determines whether the hit is “hit” or “miss”. Is determined. The result of the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol is temporarily stored in the ordinary symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and is used in the subsequent processing, and is cleared when the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. The normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 146 holds a normal symbol hit / fail lottery table (not shown) which is referred to at the time of the hit judgment of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit probability is set to “1/3001” when the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is activated. Is set to “2999/3001”.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and determines whether or not the normal symbol hit / fail judgment results in a predetermined hit symbol (a trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). If the result of the determination of the correctness of the normal symbol is a loss, a predetermined loss symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the activation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, a symbol A and a symbol B are assigned as a hit symbol of a normal symbol, while a symbol C is assigned as a lost symbol of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads out the ordinary symbol variation pattern random number value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to an unillustrated ordinary symbol variation pattern table to change the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. (Fluctuation time) is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) Is set to “0.2 seconds” when is operating. Regardless of which variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (determination display time) of the ordinary symbol is set to “0.1 second”. The normal symbol confirmation stop time (confirmation display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In the control of the ordinary symbols, when the electric tue support function is not activated in order to reduce the processing load on the main control board 100, the hit probability of the determination of the acceptability of the ordinary symbols is set to “0”, and the ordinary symbols are set. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes the fluctuation time of a single variable.

  Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a regular electric accessory opening pattern table which is referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to “0.2 seconds” when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (open extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the normal symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds opening × 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open × 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ”, and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B,“ 2.8 seconds open × 1 time → 3 seconds open × 1 time (total open time 5 times) .8 seconds). "

  When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the special game control means 150 executes a big hit start demonstration and a big hit end demonstration execution time (demo time) according to the determined big hit type (symbol group), Determine the execution time (round time). Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 to execute a big hit start demonstration effect (referred to as a “big hit start demo command”) and to execute the big hit end demonstration effect. An effect control command (referred to as a "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Note that the jackpot start demonstration command is also used as an opportunity for the effect control board 200 to determine the contents of a series of jackpot medium effects (jackpot start demonstration effect, round effect, jackpot end demonstration effect) developed during the jackpot game. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the jackpot game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the special winning opening 54, and the like. The execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demonstration is not only the big hit type (symbol group) but also the same big hit type (symbol group) according to the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. However, the execution time (demo time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration may be different.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let it. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). (Hereinafter referred to as a “fluctuation stop command”). The ordinary symbol display control means 157 causes the ordinary symbol display device 75 to variably display the ordinary symbol in accordance with the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the ordinary symbol, and causes the ordinary symbol to be definitely displayed after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operation state of the ordinary symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the ordinary symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180.

  Further, the special symbol display control means 156 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “standby demonstration command”) that triggers execution of a standby demonstration effect (customer wait demonstration effect) when the interruption state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more. Generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The phrase "the game interruption state continues for a predetermined time or more" means that a period in which there is no operation holding ball of a special symbol and no special symbol change display is performed is continued for a predetermined time or more. In addition, when the period during which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or longer, or when the period when the game ball does not enter all winning ports continues for a predetermined time or more, the interrupted state of the game is longer than a predetermined time. The specification may be continued.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the electric accessory control unit 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric auditors solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after the special symbol is determined and displayed, and The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the big hit game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is set as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed by a specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation termination condition (the unit game termination condition) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that the game ball of a prescribed count (in this embodiment, “10”) has entered the big winning port 54. Or that the opening time of the special winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds” and “2 seconds” in the present embodiment).

  In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination corresponds to a hit, the electric accessory control unit 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the (2) Open / close control of the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control unit 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric tue support function (open extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state in which the electric tue support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “10”) of game balls have entered the second starting port 52 or that the second starting port 52 That is, the total opening time has reached the opening limit time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in the present embodiment).

  When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned gaming state setting table, and determines the type of the symbol related to the big hit and The game state after the end of the big hit game is determined based on the game state of the game, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), the time-saving game state (low-probability low-base state), the latent game state (high-probability low-base state) as a plurality of game states. , A probable change game state (high-probability high base state) is set, and one of a plurality of effect modes is selectively set with reference to the above-mentioned game state setting table. Since the gaming state setting table has already been described, a duplicate description will be omitted here.

In addition, when the big hit game is executed, the game state control means 165 determines a change pattern selection state after the big hit game is completed based on the big hit type (symbol group), and also sets the fluctuation after the big hit game is ended. Switches the pattern selection state. In the present embodiment, a selection state 1, a selection state 2, a selection state 3, a selection state 4, a selection state 5, and a selection state 6 are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. One of a plurality of variation pattern selection states is selectively set in accordance with the jackpot type, the number of times of display of the special symbol, and the like. Since the variation pattern selection state has already been described, a duplicate description will be omitted here.

  The game state control unit 165 generates an effect control command (hereinafter, referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the change pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Store.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormal signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, and the like. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of the error state, the CPU requests the effect control board 200 for an effect control command (“error effect designating command”) including the error information in order to instruct the effect state effect. Although not shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the door open switch is a detection unit for detecting whether the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame open switch is for detecting whether the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called illegal game action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the game state (probability changing function, variation time) related to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game. Information of the shortening function, the electric tuner support function), the information on the variation pattern selection state, the result information of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (big hit, miss), the stop symbol (including the symbol group) related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol Information, information on the fluctuation pattern (including the fluctuation addition pattern) of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, information on the jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (opening number per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, effect control Is configured to temporarily store information such as the command data includes a predetermined memory area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Have been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, the Bit 7 of the MODE data is “1”. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. The effect control command generated in each process is transmitted, in principle, one command every interrupt cycle in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The effect control board 200 includes, as shown in FIG. 4, an effect lottery random number generating means 210, an effect generalizing means 220, a lamp control means 230, an accessory control means 240, an error effect control means 250, a sub main information storage means 260, a command Transmission / reception means 270. The above-described units in the effect control board 200 are configured by hardware such as a sub main CPU 201, a ROM 202, a RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

The production lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (production lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random number, a prefetch lottery random number used for a lottery of a prefetch effect, a decorative pattern random number used for a lottery of a stop pattern of a decorative pattern, a decorative pattern fluctuation pattern random number used for a lottery of a fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern (sub-variation pattern Random number), decorative design variation addition pattern random number (sub variation addition pattern random number) used for lottery of decoration design variation addition pattern, preview lottery random number used for preview production lottery, big hit production pattern used for big hit production pattern lottery It includes random numbers, stage lottery random numbers used for the stage lottery transition, and the like. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control-side main process described later (when an effect control command is not received from the main control board 100). I do.

  The effect management means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a variable effect control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice effect control means 226, and a special game effect control means 227. Including.

  The effect mode control means 221, based on a game state designation command from the main control board 100, takes the effect mode (“game mode”) in conformity with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Effect mode). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, “normal mode”, “suppression chance mode”, “special mode”, “illusion rush mode”, and “revenge mode” are set as a plurality of effect modes. Depending on the game state (or the change pattern selection state) managed on the main control board 100 side or the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed, any one of a plurality of effect modes is selectively set, A variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. When any of the effect modes is set, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is a back display of a decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen as an effect (fluctuating effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. ) Is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. As described above, since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently in stay from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. The details of the effect mode (game flow) will be described later.

  The reserved information display control means 222 includes a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated balls of the second special symbol. Have. When receiving the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of active balls included in this command. On the other hand, the hold information display control means 222 updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter when it receives the change start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is consumed. Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol on the holding image display section 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter. And the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of activated balls of the second special symbol is controlled. Further, the hold information display control unit 222 switches to the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball when the operation hold ball (first operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is digested. Control is performed to display the displayed changing image. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are not simply distinguished from each other and are simply referred to as “reserved images”. There is a case where the moving image of the second special symbol is simply referred to as a "changing image" without being distinguished from the changing image.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 performs a look-ahead determination (referred to as a "look-ahead lottery") on the operation-holding ball to be subjected to the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead announcement effect is a so-called continuous announcement effect in which the possibility of a jackpot winning or a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) is generated over one or more variable displays before the operation-holding ball to be pre-read is digested. It is generated as one embodiment. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100. Here, upon receiving the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, the pre-reading advance control means 223 distinguishes the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, and respectively Up to a predetermined upper limit number (four), temporary storage is performed in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in such a manner as to be combined with the order of entering operation-pending balls. The look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100. In the order of entering the starting ports 51 and 52, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store information on the result of the preliminary determination of the success / failure, the information of the result of the preliminary determination of the symbol, and the information of the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern as one set. The information of the pre-determination result is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 It is digested in the order of the storage areas (first in first out principle). When the information of the pre-determination result of the hold 1 storage area is digested, the information of the pre-determination result stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is stored in the lower-numbered storage areas, respectively. At the same time, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  The variation effect control unit 224 performs a variation process (effect) from the start of variation to the stop in variation display of a decorative symbol based on information (a main variation pattern, a main variation addition pattern, etc.) included in a variation start command from the main control board 100. Step) is determined, and a variation effect pattern (also referred to as a “sub variation pattern”) is determined. The variation effect control unit 224 holds a sub variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a sub variation pattern (variation effect pattern), and refers to this sub variation pattern table to store a plurality of types of sub variation patterns. From among them, one sub variation pattern corresponding to the main variation pattern (basic variation time) or a combination of the main variation pattern (basic variation time) and the main variation additional pattern (variation additional time) is selected by lottery. (In the present embodiment, the selection is made corresponding to the combination, but may be dependent only on the main fluctuation pattern). Here, the main variation pattern of the symbol variation is determined on the main control board 100 side, while the sub variation of the symbol variation defining the scenario of the effect display process based on the main variation pattern is determined on the effect control board 200 side. The pattern is determined. In this sub-variation pattern, a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation to the end of the variation of the decorative symbol is defined, and a notice effect is provided at each stage in the display process. The timing of the occurrence is also defined as a time schedule. After determining the sub fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation effect control unit 224 determines the sub fluctuation addition pattern corresponding to the main fluctuation addition pattern. The details of the sub fluctuation pattern and the sub fluctuation addition pattern will be described later.

  Further, upon receiving the standby demonstration command from the main control board 100, the variation effect control unit 224 receives the standby demonstration command and thereafter starts the special symbol variation display (the next variation start). During the customer waiting period (until a command is received), for example, a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the standby demonstration effect is executed only when the effect mode is the normal mode. The details of the standby demonstration effect will be described later.

The decorative symbol control unit 225 decorates the decorative effect based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variable start command from the main control board 100 and the variable effect pattern determined by the variable effect control unit 224. The final combination of symbols to be stopped (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In the present example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements including numbers and the like, for example. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables which are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbols of stop symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol patterns”) by lottery. As the plurality of types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for a big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach loss, a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach loss, and the like. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a loss (losing symbol)". The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probably variable big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same odd-numbered number are arranged (for example, “7.7.7”). A jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same even number are aligned (for example, “2.2.2”). In addition, as a modification, if the big hit is drawn in the normal mode (special mode), if the big hit becomes a trigger to shift to the fantasy fight rush mode, three symbols of the same odd number are arranged. If it is a combination of stop modes and a big hit that triggers the transition to the suppression chance mode, it is desirable that a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are arranged. The reason is that the suppression chance mode is a production mode in which the currently executed game state is a secret time-saving game state or a surely changing game state. , A jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (combination of stop modes with three identical even-numbered symbols) or a jackpot symbol indicating a specific jackpot (stop with three identical odd-numbered symbols) This is because if the (combination of modes) is stopped and displayed, the game state after the shift (before shifting to the suppression chance mode) is exposed to the player at that time. Further, as another modified example, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the SP reach D in a battle mode (phantom rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) to be described later, the result of the battle effect is a victory. If the jackpot type suggested in the above is "16R specific jackpot", a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same odd-numbered or even-numbered numbers are aligned (that is, a symbol combination of double eyes) (hereinafter, "7. Once a symbol combination other than “7.7” is displayed (temporarily stopped), it may be changed to “7.7.7” and then stopped), and its battle effect If the jackpot type suggested by the result of the defeat is "2R normal jackpot", the left symbol and the right symbol such as "2.1.2" and "6.5.6" match, for example. Only the middle pattern is different (Visually, the the same as the "reach out" symbol below) the combination of Ji out embodiments it is desirable. However, in the battle mode (illusion rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) in this modification, the stop is not performed for “7.6.7” (in other words, the reach of “7” is reached). In this case, it is desirable that the value is always “7.7 / 7”. The missing symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, “1.3.8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers. Here, the out-of-reach symbols out of the out-of-reach symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, “3.1.3”) in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, such as a 2R big hit symbol, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3.5.7" may be used. In addition, when the lottery result is a non-reach loss, a specific result called a “chance eye” (for example, “1.2.3” or “5.6.7”, "2.2.3" or "5.5.6" may be selected as the gap. Further, in the above-described pseudo continuous effect, when an effect of performing a temporary stop display and a re-variation display is performed before the final stop symbol is fixedly displayed, a special symbol ( Pseudo pattern) is selected. In the case of displaying a temporary stop symbol indicating the occurrence of a pseudo ream, at least one stop symbol (typically, a middle symbol) among the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There is a case where a special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is replaced and displayed (for example, “2 · NEXT · 3” or “2 · NEXT · 2”). Note that a stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns. In the present embodiment, the symbols are stopped in the order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle. However, if the variation time is a variation effect pattern of shortened variation in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol can be stopped almost simultaneously. Further, in the case of a special fluctuation effect pattern, it is possible to stop in the order of right symbol → middle symbol → left symbol, in which case the big hit expectation tends to be relatively high. Regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol start to change at the same time when the change starts. However, also here, as a special fluctuation effect pattern, the fluctuation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and in that case, the big hit expectation also tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect control means 226 draws a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each stage of the process of changing the decorative pattern in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by The announcement effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image or animation of a specific character, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable character, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the change display of the decorative symbol, and indicates in advance that the symbol change stops in a big hit mode with a high jackpot reliability. The announcement effects include an announcement effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including when a reach state occurs) in the decorative symbol change display process, and an announcement effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each of the announcement effects has a different jackpot reliability. Basically, the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach has a relatively higher expectation degree of the jackpot than the announcement effect displayed before the occurrence of the reach. Is getting higher. The announcement effect control means 226 holds an announcement lottery table, which is referred to when selecting an announcement effect pattern, for each type of announcement effect, and an announcement corresponding to the type of announcement effect that occurs along the scenario of the variable effect pattern. A lottery table is selected. In addition, as a kind of specific notice effect, for example, comment notice effect, background notice effect, SU (step-up) notice effect, logo notice effect, mini-character notice effect, group notice effect, character notice effect, etc. are prepared. ing. This announcement effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of advance effect displays with the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. For this reason, even in the case of a variation display of a decorative symbol with the same variation effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or more notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content of the big hit medium effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that a big hit game is being played. The jackpot medium effect includes a start demonstration effect notifying the start of the big hit game, a round effect notifying that the round game is being performed, and an end demonstration effect notifying the end of the big hit game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227, based on the big hit type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, etc., has a big hit medium effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, Round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern). In the big hit production pattern, a start demonstration production time, a round production time (a production time corresponding to the opening pattern of the special winning opening 54), and an end demonstration production time are set, and a series of along the time axis. Is set. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demonstration effect in response to receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 in accordance with the jackpot effect pattern, and executes the start demonstration effect in response to receiving the round effect designation command. A round effect is executed, and an end demonstration effect is executed upon receiving the jackpot end demo command. In the big hit start demonstration effect, for example, a character of “big hit start” is displayed on the screen to notify the start of the big hit game. In the round effect, for example, the number of currently executed rounds and the number of acquired prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demonstration effect, for example, the character “big hit end” is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game. Here, depending on whether the gaming state is a high base state or a low base state when the result of the hit determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, a big hit start demonstration time or a big hit The time and the contents of the start demonstration effect may be different, and the time and the contents of the big hit end demonstration time and the big hit end demonstration effect may be different. Further, an effect that occurs when the gaming state when the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a large hit is a low base state and does not occur when the gaming state is a high base state (for example, “ "Are you going to do my best!", An effect A) that encourages the ally character to encourage it may be generated during the big hit end demonstration, and instead, the result of the hit / fail judgment on the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit. An effect that occurs when the gaming state is high base state and does not occur when the gaming state is low base state (for example, an effect B in which the enemy character encourages the player to continue!) During the big hit end demonstration May be. Further, another effect that does not occur when the gaming state is a high base state and does not occur when the gaming state is a low base state when the result of the hit determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (eg, As a result, an effect C) in which the character “big hit +1 time” appears may be generated. In this case, the effect C can be generated if there is a jackpot in the hold (up to four holds) related to the second special symbol to be digested after the end of the jackpot demonstration, It is desirable that the effect B can be generated without requiring such a condition. However, although it is not essential, it is desirable that both the effect B and the effect C occur only during the demonstration of the end of the big hit of the special game relating to the probability change big hit.

  As described above, the production control means 220 generates image control commands for images and sounds based on the determined production contents (pre-reading production pattern, fluctuating production pattern, notice production pattern, stop design pattern, big hit production pattern, etc.) This is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting and emission color of the effect lamp in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80). Is read, and the lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory control means 240 controls the driving of each movable accessory 24 in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect generalizing means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when receiving an error effect designation command from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. I have.

  The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store information on decorative symbols, information on variable effect patterns, information on notice effect patterns, information on control commands, and the like. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, an image control board 300 ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception unit 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes a reception interruption process of a production control command (details will be described later). It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception unit 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 performs the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command with higher priority than other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level lower than 7 described later). ing.

  In addition, the command transmitting / receiving means 270 stores in the sub main information storage means 260 to instruct execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative design information, etc.) set by the effect generalizing means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. The image control command is transmitted at a predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) in principle in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes the various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and variably displays the effect image including the decorative pattern on the effect display device 70 along the scenario of the variable effect pattern. At each stage of the variation display process, a notice effect is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed on the effect of the symbol change. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260.

[Game flow]
Next, a game flow of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment, as described above. In this embodiment, a normal mode, a suppression chance mode, a special mode, a fantasy fight rush mode, and a revenge mode are set as a plurality of effect modes.

<Normal mode>
First, the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on is set to the normal mode, and the game is started from the normal mode. The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal game state (low probability low base state). When the effect mode is the normal mode, since the frequency of entering game balls into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port 52, the left hit ( The game ball is caused to enter the first starting port 51 by firing the game ball aiming at the left side area PA1), and the first special symbol is determined (the variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly executed. Become a game. In this normal mode, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type of the first special symbol, “4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)” is 5% and “4R specific big hit 2 ( "Symbol group B)" is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is 20%, "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is 20%, and "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)" 10%, "4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group F)" wins 14%, "4R normal big hit 2 (symbol group G)" wins 14%, and "4R normal big hits 3 (symbol group H)" wins 7% Occurs with probability. When the jackpot type is one of “4R specific jackpots 1 to 4 (symbol groups A to D)” and “4R normal jackpots 1 to 3 (symbol groups F to H)”, after the end of the jackpot game, It shifts to "suppression chance mode". On the other hand, when the big hit type is “4R specific big hit 5 (symbol group E)”, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the fantasy fight rush mode. Therefore, if the big hit of the first special symbol is pulled in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the “suppression chance mode” with a probability of 90%, and shifts to the “phantom rush mode” with a probability of 10%.

<Suppression Chance Mode>
The suppression chance mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving game state (low-probability high-base state) or a probable change game state (high-probability high-base state), that is, an effect mode corresponding to a high-base state in which the electric-chu support function is activated. is there. When the production mode shifts to the suppression chance mode, the electric ball support function is activated, so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is increased. By causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 by firing), it becomes possible to play the game in which the second special symbol is determined (whether the second special symbol is changed). In this suppression chance mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type of the second special symbol, “16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)” is 32.5% and “16R specific hit”. "Big hit 2 (symbol group J)" occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and "2R normal big hits (symbol group K)" occurs with a probability of 35%. If the big hit type is any of "16R specific big hits 1-2 (symbol groups I and J)", after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to "phantom rush mode". On the other hand, when the big hit type is “2R normal big hit (symbol group K)”, after the big hit game ends, the mode shifts to the “revenge mode”. Therefore, when the big hit of the second special symbol is pulled in the suppression chance mode, the game shifts to the “illusion rush mode” with a probability of 65% and shifts to the “revenge mode” with a probability of 35%.

  In addition, the suppression chance mode is continued from the end of the big hit game until the number of times of display of the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The upper limit number of the suppression chance mode is the same number as the above-described fluctuation time reduction number and the number of times of the electric support, and is the big hit type of the first special symbol (the big hit type of the first special symbol which has triggered the shift to the suppression special mode). ) Is set to the upper limit number (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times). Specifically, the upper limit number of the suppression chance mode is such that the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the suppression chance mode is “4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)” or “4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)”. In some cases, “20 times” is set. In the case of “4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)” or “4R regular jackpot 2 (symbol group G)”, “40 times” is set, and “4R specific jackpot” is set. In the case of "3 (symbol group C)" or "4R regular big hit 3 (symbol group H)", "60 times" is set, and in the case of "4R specific big hit 4 (symbol group D)", "10000 times" Is set. Then, in the suppression chance mode, when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches the upper limit number (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times) without occurrence of the next big hit, this suppression chance The mode ends, and the mode shifts to the special mode.

<Special mode>
The special mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal game state (low-probability low-base state) or a latent game state (high-probability low-base state), that is, an effect corresponding to a low-base state in which the electric-chu support function is not activated. Mode. As described above, the special mode is set when the number of times of display of the special symbol in the suppression chance mode reaches a predetermined upper limit number (set after exiting the electric support state). When the effect mode is the special mode, the frequency of game balls entering the first starting port 51 is set to be higher than the frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port 52. The game ball is caused to enter the first starting port 51 by firing the game ball aiming at the left side area PA1), and the first special symbol is determined (the variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly executed. Become a game. In this special mode, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type of the first special symbol, “4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group A)” is 5% and “4R specific big hit 2 ( "Symbol group B)" is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is 20%, "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is 20%, and "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)" 10%, "4R normal big hit 1 (symbol group F)" wins 14%, "4R normal big hit 2 (symbol group G)" wins 14%, and "4R normal big hits 3 (symbol group H)" wins 7% Occurs with probability. In the special mode, the game state set after the end of the big hit game may be different according to the game state (normal game state, latent game state) at the time of the big hit winning. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal gaming state, the big hit types of the first special symbol are “4R specific big hits 1 to 4 (symbol groups A to D)” and “4R normal big hits 1 to 3 (symbols). Group F to H) ", the game shifts to the" suppression chance mode "after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit type of the first special symbol is" 4R specific big hit 5 (symbol group E) ". In such a case, the game shifts to the “phantom rush mode” after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the latent game state, the big hit types of the first special symbol are “4R specific big hits 1 to 3 (symbol groups A to C)” and “4R normal big hits 1 to 3 ( If it is any of the symbol groups F to H), the game shifts to the “suppression chance mode” after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot type of the first special symbol is “4R specific jackpot 4, 5 (symbol group D, E) ", the game shifts to" phantom rush mode "after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the number of times of the high base state (the number of times of fluctuation time reduction) differs depending on the gaming state when the result of the determination of the first special symbol winning / falling is a big hit. Even if the symbols that trigger the transition to the “suppression chance mode” are the same (especially, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is any of “4R specific jackpots 1 to 3 (symbol groups A to C)”), The number of stays varies depending on the gaming state when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

  In the case where the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state, when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 10 without occurrence of the next big hit, the mode is shifted from the next variable display to the normal mode. . On the other hand, when the gaming state in the special mode is the latent game state, even if the number of times the special symbol has been changed to 10 has been reached without the occurrence of the next big hit, the next changed display is normally performed. It does not shift to the mode and stays in the special mode until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, the current game state is kept confidential from the time immediately after the shift to the special mode until the display of the fluctuation of 10 rotations is completed. Further, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation display of 10 rotations immediately after the transition to the latent mode, a remaining number notification effect for notifying the remaining number of times until the fluctuation display of 10 rotations ends, and a fluctuation display of 10 rotations After the end of the special mode, a mode branch effect indicating whether the special mode is continued or ended is executed. The details of the remaining number notification effect and the mode branching effect will be described later.

<Fantasy rush mode>
The fantasy fight rush mode is an effect mode corresponding to a probable change game state (high probability high base state). When the production mode shifts to the phantom rush mode, the electric-chu support function is activated to increase the ease of entry of game balls into the second starting port 52, so that the right-handed (game balls aiming at the right area PA2) ), The game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the game is performed such that the second special symbol is determined (whether the second special symbol is changed).
In this fantasy fighting rush mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit, “16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)” is 32.5% and “16R” as the big hit type of the second special symbol. "Specific big hit 2 (symbol group J)" occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and "2R normal big hit (symbol group K)" occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any one of “16 specific jackpots 1 to 2 (symbol group I, J)”, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the “phantom rush mode” again. On the other hand, when the big hit type of the second special symbol is “2R normal big hit (symbol group K)”, the game falls to the “revenge mode” after the big hit game ends. This fantasy fight rush mode is continued until the number of times of display of the special symbol changes reaches “1000” (that is, until the next big hit occurs substantially).

<Revenge mode>
The revenge mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state). When the effect mode shifts to the revenge mode, the electric-chu support function is activated, so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is increased. This makes the game ball enter the second starting port 52, so that the second special symbol is determined to be appropriate (variable display of the second special symbol). In this revenge mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type of the second special symbol, “16R specific big hit 1 (symbol group I)” is 32.5% and “16R specific big hit” 2 (symbol group J) "occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and" 2R ordinary big hit (symbol group K) "occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any one of “16 specific jackpots 1 to 2 (symbol groups I and J)”, the game shifts to the fantasy fight rush mode after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the big hit type of the second special symbol is “2R normal big hit (symbol group K)”, after the big hit game ends, the mode again shifts to the revenge mode. This revenge mode is continued until the number of times of display of the special symbol changes reaches “100”. Therefore, when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100 without occurrence of the next big hit in the revenge mode, the revenge mode is terminated, and the next variable display is shifted to the normal mode.

≪Battle mode≫
In the present embodiment, of the plurality of effect modes, the effect mode in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game is configured as a battle mode in which a battle effect in which the ally character battles the enemy character is developed. I have. That is, when the effect mode is the battle mode, when the variation display is developed into SP reach, a battle effect in which the ally character battles the enemy character to determine a win or loss is developed. In the present embodiment, the “suppression chance mode”, the “illusion rush mode”, and the “revenge mode” correspond to the battle mode. In this battle mode, the jackpot winning is determined when the game reaches the SP reach (when the battle effect is started). Then, the type of the jackpot is suggested or notified according to the effect of the battle effect (the result of the battle). In other words, a specific jackpot (“4R specific jackpot” in the variation display of the first special symbol, and “16R specific jackpot” in the variation display of the second special symbol) is determined when the ally character defeats the enemy character as an effect of the battle effect. Then, when the ally character defeats the enemy character, a normal jackpot ("4R normal jackpot" in the first special symbol variation display and "2R normal jackpot" in the second special symbol variation display) is determined. The details of the battle effect will be described later.

変 Anomalous transition when an accident occurs in normal mode (1) ≫
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the currently executed effect mode is the normal mode, if the predetermined special transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the revenge mode. The “special transition condition” means that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the second special symbol (in the normal mode) is a big hit (so-called accident hit occurs). That is, when the effect mode is the normal mode (including the normal mode immediately after the power is turned on), the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (the display of the change of the first special symbol) should be the main game. However, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 in spite of the low base state, the result of the right / wrong judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (so-called accident hit), or the high base state changes to a low hit. Immediately before shifting to the base state, one or more reserves relating to the second special symbol remain, and as a result of the reservation being exhausted in the low base state, the result of the right / wrong determination of the second special symbol is a big hit (this event is also If the second special symbol is “16R specific big hit 1”, “16R specific big hit 2”, or “2R normal big hit”, the second special symbol Variation table of special symbols At the beginning, by transition to Revenge mode rendering mode from the normal mode, and executes the variable display of the second special symbol in this Revenge mode (variable display of big hit).

The reason for this is as follows. First, in the normal mode, the fluctuation effect of the big hit is determined when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the normal mode, is a big hit, and when any of the big hit types is won. Even so, it is designed on the assumption that a predetermined number of prize balls (4 rounds × 10 counts × 15 = 600) can be obtained in the big hit game. On the other hand, when a big hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal mode, if the big hit type is 2R normal big hit, the expected value of winning a prize ball in the big hit game is substantially 0 (or a little winning ball is obtained). Although there may be an expected value, the acquisition of 2 rounds × 10 counts × 15 pieces = 300 pieces is at least an expected value that cannot be expected), and the contents of the large jackpot fluctuation effect in the normal mode (for example, the result of the SP reach effect) If the actual game result is a 2R normal big hit (0 prize balls), the direct Mismatch may occur between the content and the game result (profit mode), which may cause the player to feel discomfort or distrust. In other words, the jackpot type (16R specific jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) of the second special symbol is designed assuming a fluctuation effect based on battle specifications in the first place, and as a result of the fluctuation effect in the revenge mode. It is appropriate to use. Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is subtracted while the currently executing effect mode is the normal mode, the effect mode is changed to the normal mode at the start of the change display of the jackpot of the second special symbol. To revenge mode (battle mode).

  However, although the effect mode shifts to the revenge mode (effect mode corresponding to the time-saving game state), internally the game state remains the normal game state, and the variation pattern selection state corresponds to the selection corresponding to the time-saving game state. Instead of the state 6, the selection state 1 corresponding to the normal game state is maintained. Therefore, in order to execute the variation effect (battle specification) in the revenge mode under the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the selection state 1, the variation at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the selection state 1 is performed. The pattern selection tendency is set to be the same as the variation pattern selection tendency at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the selection state 6 (revenge mode). That is, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol at the time of the big hit in the selection state 1 is constructed on the assumption that the variation display is performed in the revenge mode instead of the normal mode as the effect mode. Therefore, in the case where the second special symbol big hit occurs in the normal mode, even if the effect mode is irregularly shifted from the normal mode to the revenge mode, inconsistency or contradiction occurs between the effect content and the game result. Therefore, the game effect can be smoothly advanced without giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust before and after the transition to the effect mode.

変 Anomalous transition when an accident occurs in normal mode (2) ≫
In the present embodiment, the number of times the revenge mode is continued is set to “100 times” as the number of times of display of the special symbol, and the number of times of display of the change of the special symbol without occurrence of the next big hit during execution of the revenge mode. When "100 times" is reached, the effect mode falls from the revenge mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode falls to the normal mode, this normal mode is an effect mode that is set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). Judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) should be the main subject of the game, but immediately after falling from the revenge mode to the normal mode, the second special symbol generated during the execution of the revenge mode (time saving game state) is executed. There is a high possibility that the operation-holding ball remains, and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol. It can be said that this is a situation in which symbol fluctuation display is easily performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, in the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode, the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (that is, the above-mentioned special transition condition is satisfied). ), As described above, the revenge mode is continued without switching the effect mode from the revenge mode to the normal mode at the start of the variable display (without terminating the revenge mode). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol changes and displays in the revenge mode reaches “100”, it normally falls to the normal mode. However, the second special symbol changes display immediately after the end of the revenge mode. When the big hit is drawn, the revenge mode is continued as it is, and the big hit of the second special symbol is generated in the revenge mode of substantially the 101st rotation. As a result, the revenge mode can be continued beyond the original upper limit number (100 times), and although it is internally a big hit that occurred after falling to the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state is simulated. It can be seen as if a big hit has occurred when the continuation of (continuous appearance of the extended-villa state). Here, when the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the game falls to the normal mode regardless of whether the result of the hit determination is a big hit or not.

≪Restaurant information≫
In the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200, predetermined extended holiday information is stored as effect information to be informed of the current game situation and the effect state. The extended-village information is basically presentation information set in accordance with the state of the extended-village. This extended-villa information is a useful judgment material for the player to know the current game situation and the production state. Here, the extended game state is a game state in the non-special game state, and after the occurrence of a first hit which triggers a transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state, without returning to the non-specific game state, the specific game state It refers to a state in which the state continues (a state in which a big hit in the specific game state is continuously occurring). In addition, the specific game state is a game state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than the normal game state, and in a broad sense, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support. A game state in which any of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game.

  The extended holiday information includes “selected character information”, “acquired ball number information”, “number of extended holidays information”, “special movie information”, “special production information”, “music release information”, and the like. “Selected character information” is information of a character (friend character) selected by a player before or at the start of a series as a character appearing in various effects in the state of the series. The “acquired ball number information” is information on the number of prize balls (cumulative number) that can be acquired during the extended-game state. The “number of consecutive holidays information” is information on the number of consecutive big hits (the number of consecutive large hits that trigger the transition to the specific game state) during the consecutive holidays state. The “special effect 1 information” is information on the number of consecutive big hits in the consecutive villas that triggers execution of the special effect 1. Note that the special effect 1 is a case where the same character selected by the player in the extended game state wins the battle effect a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) (however, the 16R specific big hit is used as the big hit type of the second special symbol). This is a story effect (special movie) related to the character, which is executed during the condition. The “special effect 2 information” is information on the number of consecutive big hits in the consecutive cottage that triggers execution of the special effect 2. The special effect 2 is executed when the battle effect is won a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) during the extended-villa state (provided that 16R specific big hit is a condition of the big hit type of the second special symbol). This is an effect of displaying rare characters with high rarity one by one in order. The special effect 2 is an invariable effect that does not depend on the character, whereas the special effect 1 is a character-specific effect that depends on the character selected by the player. “Song release information” is information on the number of consecutive big hits in a consecutive villa that triggers release of a new song. In the present embodiment, each time a battle performance is won a prescribed number of times (for example, once) (provided that a 16R jackpot is used as the jackpot type of the second special symbol), new songs are released one by one. In addition to the fixed songs (for example, three songs) that can be selected from the first hit, the newly opened song can be selected by the player. Here, the music may not be selectable by the player, and may be output according to the state of the extended villa (that is, when the music release condition is satisfied, the released music is automatically set at the time when the music release condition is satisfied). May be output).

  In the present embodiment, the extended holiday information (number of extended holidays) is updated according to the rendering mode information (background information, rendering stage information) currently being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, until the production mode falls to the normal mode (until the production mode exits the fantasy battle rush mode, revenge mode, suppression chance mode, or special mode), the extended-villa information is updated, and the production mode is changed. Clears (resets) the extended-village information when it falls into the normal mode (except for the special mode, which updates the extended-village information until the production mode exits the fantasy fight rush mode, revenge mode, or suppression chance mode) May be used). Then, exceptionally, when the big hit of the second special symbol is drawn in the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode, the gaming state actually falls to the normal gaming state (the extended-village state ends). Although the production mode does not fall to the normal mode, the revenge mode is continued without falling, and the extended-villa information is not cleared, and the extended-villa information is maintained as it is, and the appearance of the extended-villa state is simulated. Should be continued. In this way, by managing various types of extended-village information based on the production mode information instead of the game state information, inconsistencies may occur between the production mode (background screen) and the extended-village information, and the player may feel uncomfortable or untrustworthy. The situation that embraces is prevented beforehand.

At this time, when the extended game state ends based on the fact that the revenge mode ends (the gaming state falls to the normal state), the external information terminal plate 600 is turned off by the end of the revenge mode. As an external information signal to be output to the external device (data display, hall computer), the in-house signal is not output (it is turned off). Therefore, even if the big hit of the second special symbol is drawn in the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode, the in-house signal from the external information terminal plate 600 that has been continuously output until the end of the revenge mode is once output. The output is interrupted (the output is once turned off), and then the output is started again with the hit. The signal during the extended holiday is a signal indicating that the extended holiday is in the extended holiday state, and more specifically, in the low base state, the result of the success / failure determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. As a result, the output is started triggered by the execution of the special game, and in the high base state and the high base state to be shifted thereafter, the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit. This is a signal that is continuously output during execution of the special game executed, and is a signal that ends the output when shifting to the low base state as the game state during the non-special game.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko gaming machine PM having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 in accordance with the progress of the game and the like. . In the following, among the various game effects, "special effect", "hold change effect", "battle effect", "meter effect", "base suppression effect", "remaining number notification effect effect", "mode branch effect" The contents will be described.

[Special production]
The special effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the special effect. When the effect mode is the normal mode (including the special mode), the special effect is configured as a preliminary effect before the pseudo fluctuation (pseudo-2 fluctuation, pseudo-3 fluctuation) is performed during the execution of the fluctuation display. . The elemental effects that make up this special effect can be broadly classified into “companion participation effects”, “aura-use effects”, and “aura-connected effects”. Therefore, the special effect is configured by a combination of one or more types of such element effects. Here, the types of friend participation production are broadly classified into "one friend participation production" in which one fellow character participates, and "two friend participation production" in which two friend characters participate simultaneously. The types of aura connected effects are broadly classified into "musou connected effects" in which the auras of two fellow characters are connected, and "ultimate connected effects" in which the auras of three friend characters are connected. The types of aura-use productions are broadly classified into "normal aura-use productions", which use the aura of a fellow character to make a normal attack, and "special aura-use productions", which use the aura of a fellow character to make a special attack. You. The detailed contents of each element effect will be described later.

<Variable additional information>
The special effect is an effect executed based on the variation additional information (sub-developed variation additional information) specified by the sub variation additional pattern. In the present embodiment, the basic pattern of the special effect is specified by the main change additional pattern, and the detailed pattern of the special effect is specified by the sub change additional pattern. In other words, the main fluctuation addition pattern is a basic pattern of a special effect that defines a scenario including the number of executions of each element effect, an execution order, and the like as a general flow of the special effect. The sub-variation addition pattern is a detailed pattern of a special effect that defines the scenario of each element effect, including the execution timing of each element effect, based on the number of executions, the execution order, and the like of each element effect specified by the main variation addition pattern. Becomes

In the present embodiment, the basic pattern and the detailed pattern of the special effect are divided into four layers and the lottery is sequentially performed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the four hierarchical structures, the first hierarchy (main variation pattern) → the second hierarchy (main variation addition pattern) → the third hierarchy (sub variation pattern) → the fourth hierarchy (sub variation addition pattern) Are performed in this order, the basic pattern and the detailed pattern of the special effect are determined. For the first and second levels, the lottery process is performed by the main control board 100, and for the third and fourth levels, the lottery process is performed by the effect control board. Here, since the main fluctuation pattern (first hierarchy) has already been described in detail, in the following, the main fluctuation addition pattern (second hierarchy), the sub fluctuation pattern (third hierarchy), and the sub fluctuation addition pattern (first hierarchy) The following description focuses on (4 layers). Since this special effect is an effect performed when the game state is the normal game state (or the latent game state), in the following description, the main fluctuation pattern (variation The contents of the processing in each layer will be described with respect to the main variation addition pattern, the sub variation pattern, and the sub variation addition pattern corresponding to the main variation pattern specified in the pattern table 1).

(Main variation addition pattern)
First, the main variation adding pattern in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the main fluctuation pattern, the main fluctuation addition table, and the main fluctuation addition pattern. The main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 in the figure correspond to the main fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, each of the main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 is associated with one of a plurality of types of main fluctuation addition tables A to F. . Each of the main variation addition tables A to F is assigned one or more types of main variation addition patterns to be selected from among the eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. One main variation additional pattern is selected by lottery from one or more types of main variation additional patterns 1 to 8. In the figure, for convenience, numerical values to be provided for the lottery are omitted, but actually, for each of the main fluctuation addition tables A to F, the acquired lottery random number value (special symbol fluctuation addition pattern random number value) is obtained. A determination number (a range of a random number random number value) for determining the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 is set, and the random number value (special symbol variation addition pattern random number value) is assigned to any determination number. One main variation addition pattern is selected from one or a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 associated with each of the main variation addition tables A to F based on whether they belong.

  The upper part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence relationship between the main fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA13 for the loss, the main fluctuation additional tables A to F, and the main fluctuation additional patterns 1 to 8. For example, the main fluctuation addition table A is associated with the main fluctuation patterns PH1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, and 1-7, and only the main fluctuation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate. Specified. The main variation patterns PH1-3 and 1-4 are associated with the main variation addition pattern B, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1 and 2 are selection candidates. The main variation addition tables C are associated with the main variation patterns PH1-8 and 1-9, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table D is associated with the main variation pattern PH1-10, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. The main fluctuation patterns 1-11, 1-12 are associated with the main fluctuation addition table E, and it is specified that the main fluctuation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 are selection candidates. The main variation pattern 1-13 is associated with the main variation addition table F, and all the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are specified as selection candidates. .

The lower part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence relationship between the main variation patterns PA1-1 to 1-14 for big hits, the main variation addition tables A to F, and the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. For example, the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-1 to 1-3 and 1-10 to 1-14, and it is specified that only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate. The main variation addition tables C are associated with the main variation patterns PA1-4 to PA1-5, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table D is associated with the main variation pattern PA1-6, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table E is associated with the main variation patterns PA1-7 to PA1-8, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7 are selection candidates. The main fluctuation addition table F is associated with the main fluctuation addition pattern PA1-9, and all the main fluctuation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are specified as selection candidates. .

  In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience of explanation, each of the main fluctuation addition tables A to F is configured as a common main fluctuation addition table without distinguishing between the loss use and the big hit use. It is preferable that the main variation addition tables A to F for the loss and the variation addition pattern tables A 'to F' for the big hit are separately configured. In other words, the main variation addition tables A to F for misses and the main variation addition tables A ′ to F ′ for big hits have the same type of main variation addition patterns as selection candidates, but are different from those for the misses and big hits. It is preferable that the determination number (selection rate) is made different for the use and that the special effect (element effect) having a high degree of expectation is more easily selected for the big hit than for the loss. For example, common main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are assigned to the main variation addition pattern C for the outlier and the main variation addition pattern table C 'for the big hit as the main variation addition patterns of the selection candidates, respectively. In the main variation addition table C for the main variation, it is easy to select the main variation addition pattern 2 having a relatively low expectation of a big hit. Pattern 3 (a pattern in which “musou connection”, which is an effect with a high jackpot expectation) can be easily selected. In addition, since the main variation addition patterns A and A ′ are not determined as selection candidates of the main variation addition pattern, only a single main variation addition pattern A may be actually prepared. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to prepare a total of 11 types of main fluctuation addition tables, that is, main fluctuation addition tables A to F for a loss and main fluctuation addition tables A and B 'to F' for a big hit. Become. In the main fluctuation addition table A, only the main fluctuation addition pattern 1 described later is a selection candidate. In the main fluctuation addition pattern 1, “0 seconds” is set as the fluctuation addition time of the symbol, and the production length of the special effect is reduced. In order to mean that the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 do not need to be provided in the first place, as a modified example, it means that the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 are not provided. The types of the main variation addition table may be only B to F. In each table, it is preferable that the main variation addition pattern (selection candidate) shown in FIG. is there. In this modification, when a main variation pattern to which a variation can be added is selected and a lottery is determined as to whether or not to perform the variation addition, a main variation addition table (B to F) corresponding to the main variation pattern is selected. ) May be configured to select the main variation addition pattern based on either of the above.

Next, FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram for explaining a main variation adding pattern. In the present embodiment, as described above, all eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are prepared. In the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8, different variation addition information (variation addition time) is defined. Although the value of the variation addition time specified by the type of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 is omitted in the drawing, one variation addition time is actually provided for each main variation addition pattern 1 to 8. Time is associated. The variation addition time has different time values depending on the types of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. In the present embodiment, the number of executions of each element effect (affiliation effect, aura-use effect, aura-connected effect) and the like are specified by the change additional information (change addition time). In the figure, for example, as the variation additional information of the main variation additional pattern 7, “[naka] 2 [use] 1 [connection] 0” indicates that the number of executions of the companion participation effect is 2 and the number of executions of the aura use effect is 1 Times, which means that the number of executions of the aura connected effect is 0. Note that “[naka] 0 [use] 0 [connection] 0” as the variation additional information of the main variation additional pattern 1 means that the number of executions of the companion participation effect, the aura use effect, and the aura connection effect is all zero. (That is, no element effect is performed). Therefore, in the main variation addition pattern 1, “0 seconds” is set as the variation addition time of the symbol, which means that no special effect length is provided (the special effect is not performed). Therefore, a main variation pattern in which only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate (a main variation pattern to which the main variation addition table A is assigned) is a main variation pattern in which a special effect is not executed. In addition, for each of the seven main variation addition patterns 2 to 8, for example, “8 seconds”, “12 seconds”, “16 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “14 seconds”, “18 seconds” , "22 seconds" may be set. In addition, the flow of the main fluctuation addition pattern and the special effect are not limited to the types shown in FIG. 18 and various other main fluctuation addition patterns and the flow of the special effect are provided in order to realize more various effects. May be.

  In the figure, the flow of the special effect corresponding to each variation additional information is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, since there are certain rules for developing each element effect, such as the order of participation of the fellow characters, the connection conditions of the aura, the use order of the aura, the number of executions of each element effect Once decided, the general flow of special production will be determined. However, the execution timing of each element effect (the number of pseudo fluctuations in which each element effect is performed) is specified by a sub-variation addition pattern (detailed later) obtained by sub-expanding this main fluctuation addition pattern. Become.

  Although not shown, only the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation patterns defined in the special symbol variation pattern tables 2 to 6 in FIGS. That is, when the main variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern tables 2 to 6, only the main variation addition table A is associated and the main variation addition pattern 1 is always set regardless of which main variation pattern is selected. Only can be a selection candidate. The reason is that the variation pattern tables 2 to 6 are variation pattern tables that are set corresponding to a game state (effect mode) in which a special effect is not performed. This is because “0 second” needs to be set as the (measure) (only the main variation addition pattern 1 needs to be selected). Further, as described above, as a modified example, when the main variation adding table A and the main variation adding pattern 1 are not provided in the first place, and when the main variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern tables 2 to 6, First, the main variation adding pattern is not selected.

(Sub fluctuation pattern)
Next, the sub fluctuation pattern according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for a loss, and FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for a big hit. In each of the sub fluctuation pattern tables, the correspondence relationship between the main fluctuation pattern, the main fluctuation addition table, the main fluctuation addition pattern, and the sub fluctuation pattern is defined. In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns are associated with a combination of one main variation pattern and one main variation addition pattern. Specifically, when one main variation additional pattern is determined for one main variation pattern, one of the one or more types of sub variation patterns corresponding to the combination of the main variation pattern and the main variation additional pattern is determined. Two sub-variation patterns will be selected by lottery. That is, the sub fluctuation pattern is determined based on a combination of the main fluctuation pattern and the main fluctuation addition pattern. As a modification, one or more types of sub-variation patterns may be associated with one main variation pattern (that is, not a combination with the main variation addition pattern).

Here, as for the main fluctuation patterns (main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-4, 1-7, 1-10, 1-13) having no branch of the effects such as the reach effect and the fanning effect, one sub-variation pattern is used. Only are associated. On the other hand, as for main fluctuation patterns (main fluctuation patterns PH1-5 to 1-6, 1-8 to 1-9, 1-11 to 1-12) with branching of productions such as reach productions and fanning productions, there are a plurality of types. Are associated with each other. For example, two sub-variation patterns PH1-5-1 and 1-5-2 are associated with a main variation pattern PH1-5 having a staging branch. More specifically, in the main fluctuation pattern PH1-5, it is stipulated that the reach will be developed into SP reach A or SP reach B after the reach is established. In PH1-5-1, SP reach A is defined as a development destination, and in the sub-variation pattern PH1-5-2, SP reach B is defined as a development destination. That is, when the branch of the effect is set in the main variation pattern, the type of the effect of the branch destination (for example, the type of the SP reach of the development destination) is determined in the sub variation pattern. In other words, one main variation pattern PH1-5 is configured to cover two types of SP reach candidates, and the sub variation pattern associated with it is used to specify which SP reach is to be achieved. Has become.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the SP reach is related to the type (the number of appearances) of the friend characters appearing in the friend participation performance. Among a plurality of types of reach productions, SP reach A is a reach production in which one friend character A appears, SP reach B is a reach production in which two friend characters A and B appear, and SP reach C is This is a reach effect in which three fellow characters A, B, and C appear. If the friend participation production is performed before the development to the SP reach A to C, it is guaranteed that the fellow characters who participated in the friend participation production will also appear in the SP reach. In other words, among the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters who have participated in the fellow participation production will also appear in SP reach (the number of participating competitor characters in the fellow participation production ≦ the number of fellow characters appearing in the SP reach production). . Therefore, the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach A (including the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach A) is the additional variation information (main variation additional pattern 1) or 1 where the fellow character does not participate in the battle. It is associated with the variation additional information (main variation additional pattern 2) in which only human fellow characters participate in the battle, and is not associated with the variation additional information (main variation additional patterns 3 to 8) in which multiple fellow characters participate in the battle. . The sub variation pattern that develops into SP reach B (including the sub variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach B) is variation additional information (main variation additional pattern) in which one or two fellow characters participate in the battle. 1 to 7), and is not associated with the variation addition information (main variation addition pattern 8) in which three fellow characters participate in the battle. The sub-variation pattern that develops into SP Reach C (excluding the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP Reach C via SP Reach A or SP Reach B) is all variation addition in which one to three fellow characters participate in the battle. It is associated with the information (main variation addition patterns 1 to 8). Therefore, for example, the main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation pattern PH1-8, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are assigned to the main variation addition table C. Of the main fluctuation additional patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7, the main fluctuation additional patterns 1 and 2 (variation additional information in which only one companion character participates) are sub fluctuation patterns 1-8-1 (SP reach). A), 1-8-2 (SP reach B) is a selection candidate, whereas the main variation additional patterns 3, 7 (variation additional information in which a plurality of fellow characters participate in the battle) are sub variation patterns. Only 1-8-2 (SP reach B) is a selection candidate. The present embodiment is configured so that the selection candidate of the sub variation pattern (SP reach type) can be different depending on the main variation addition pattern combined with the main variation pattern.

(Sub fluctuation addition pattern)
Next, the sub-variation addition pattern in the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 21 to 22 are schematic diagrams showing a sub-variation addition pattern table for a loss, and FIGS. 23 to 24 are schematic diagrams showing a sub-variation addition pattern table for a big hit. In the present embodiment, as described above, the execution timing of each element effect is specified as a detailed pattern obtained by sub-expanding the basic pattern of the special effect by the sub-variation addition pattern.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the correspondence between the sub-variation pattern, the main variation addition pattern, and the sub-variation addition pattern is defined in the sub-variation addition pattern table. In the present embodiment, one or more types of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with each of the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8, and any one of the one or more types of sub-variation addition patterns is selected. An additional pattern is selected by lottery. In the figure, for convenience, the numerical values to be provided for the lottery are omitted, but in practice, the obtained set random number value is determined by the number of determinations for determining the sub-variation addition pattern (the range of the random number value). ) Is set, and one sub-variation addition pattern is determined from one or a plurality of types of sub-variation addition patterns based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to. .

  In the figure, [1] to [3] mean the timing at which each element effect is executed. [1] means that the pseudo 1 change is being executed, [2] means that the pseudo 2 change is being executed, and [3] means that the pseudo 3 change is being executed. For example, “[1] Two friends participated in battle → [1] Musou connection → [1] Use of aura” means that during the execution of pseudo 1 change, two friends participation war, Musou connected production, and aura use production are performed in order. Means In addition, “[1] One Friend Participation → [1] Muso Connection → [2] Normal Aura Use” ”means that during the execution of the pseudo one change, the one friend participation production and the Musou connection production are performed in order, and the pseudo two change Means that a normal aura-use production is performed during the execution of. In addition, "[2] Two friends participated in battle → [2] Musou connection → [2] Use of aura" means that during the execution of pseudo 2 fluctuation, two friends participation battle, Musou connected production, and aura use production are performed in order. Means That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of each element effect specified by the sub-variation change addition pattern means the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation at which the element effect is performed.

  At this time, for example, three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3 are associated with the main variation addition pattern 8 shown in FIG. 21, and these sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-. One of the three sub-variation addition patterns is selected by lottery. As shown in FIG. 18 described above, the main variation adding pattern 8 includes a flow of an effect of “participation of two friends → musou connection → one participation of friend → ultimate connection” as a basic pattern of the special effect (each of the element effects). Execution order) is specified. On the other hand, the three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3 associated with the main variation addition pattern 8 include “[1] Two-man participation → [1] Musou Consolidation → [1] Two friends participate [1] Ultimate connection ”,“ [1] Two friends participation [1] Musou connection → [2] Two friend participation → [2] Ultimate connection ”,“ [2 [2] Competition of two companions → [2] Musou connection → [2] Competition of two companions → [2] Ultimate connection ”. As described above, in the sub-variation addition pattern, the execution timing of each element effect (in what number of pseudo fluctuations the element effect is performed) is specified based on the flow of each element effect specified in the main fluctuation addition pattern. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the main variation additional pattern (variation additional information) is the same, a sub variation additional pattern selection candidate (execution timing of each element effect) is selected according to the type of the selected sub variation pattern. Are configured to be different. For example, when the sub variation pattern PH1-3-1 is selected for the same main variation addition pattern 2, only one sub variation addition pattern 2-1 is selected as the corresponding sub variation addition pattern. On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern PH1-4-1 is selected, three sub-variation addition patterns 2-1 to 2-3 are selected as corresponding sub-variation addition patterns. At this time, since the sub fluctuation pattern PH1-3-1 is a fluctuation effect pattern in which only the pseudo 1 fluctuation is performed, only the sub fluctuation addition pattern 2-1 in which the execution timing of each element effect is the pseudo 1 fluctuation is a selection candidate. Becomes On the other hand, since the sub fluctuation pattern PH1-4-1 is a fluctuation effect pattern performed from pseudo 1 fluctuation to pseudo 2 fluctuation, the sub fluctuation addition pattern 2 in which the execution timing of each element effect is pseudo 1 fluctuation or pseudo 2 fluctuation. -1 to 2-3 are to be selected. As described above, since the width of selection of the execution timing of each element effect differs depending on the number of pseudo-runs specified by the sub-variation pattern, the sub-variation pattern is accordingly set even if the main variation addition pattern is the same. Depending on the type, the selection candidate of the sub-variation addition pattern may be different.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special effects (each element effect) will be described in order. As described above, this special effect is configured to include a friend participation effect, an aura-connected effect, and an aura-use effect as each element effect. Here, FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of a special effect (a background screen in a normal mode). When the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the logo display area 730 on the screen includes a logo icon 731 imitating a logo (described as “LOGO” in the illustrated example) indicating the model name of the gaming machine, An ally icon 732 imitating the ally character X as the main character of the model, and friend icons 733, 732, and 735 simulating a plurality of friend characters A, B, and C are displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the friend icons 733 to 735 changes according to the progress of the special effect (details will be described later). FIG. 26 shows an effect pattern table of each element effect (companion participation effect, aura linked effect, and aura-use effect). The detailed contents of the effect pattern table will be described later.

≪Participation in war participation 戦
FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the companion participation production and the aura connection production. The friend participation effect is an effect in which an aura (aura image) is displayed around the corresponding friend icons 733 to 735 when the friend character participates in the ally character. Hereinafter, “acquire an aura” means that an aura is displayed around the friend icons 733 to 735. In the present embodiment, “companion character A”, “companion character B”, and “companion character C” are set as a plurality of companion characters, and according to the number of participants (1, 2, 3) The number of auras (1, 2, 3) can be acquired. In other words, the number of participating competitor characters and the number of acquired auras correspond in a 1: 1 relationship. Therefore, as the number of participating competitor characters increases, more auras can be acquired, and the degree of expectation of pseudo-continuous occurrence or continuation is improved.

  As described above, the types of the companion participation production include a companion participation production in which one companion character participates in the battle and obtains one aura, and two companion characters simultaneously participate in the battle and display two auras. There are two companion productions to get. Note that, as a modification, a three-man battle effect in which three friend characters A, B, and C simultaneously participate in the battle and acquire three auras at a time may be prepared.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of executions of the companion participation effect is set in the range of “0 times” to “2 times”. When the number of executions of the companion participation effect is set to a plurality of times, different ally characters A to C participate each time in each of the companion production effects. The order in which the friend characters A to C participate in the battle is always set to a fixed order (order of appearance). Specifically, the friend characters A to C are arranged in the order of “friend character B” → “friend character B” → “friend character C”. The character participates. Therefore, the friend character B does not participate in the battle before the friend character A, and the friend character C does not participate in the battle before the friend character B. As a modification of the present embodiment, for example, when a friend character participates in an order that is contrary to the regular entry order, such as “friend character B” → “friend character A” (when a rule break occurs). Alternatively, the specification may be such that the jackpot winning, the pseudo-continuous occurrence or continuation is determined at that time.

FIG. 26 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a friend participation effect pattern table. In the companion participation effect pattern table, a plurality of types of companion participation effect patterns 1 to 5 are defined. In the friend participation performance appearance patterns 1 to 5, the type of the friend character appearing in the friend participation production and the number of auras (acquisition number) acquired in the friend participation production are associated with each other. In the present embodiment, a fellow participation effect pattern corresponding to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of the special effect) is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, since the order of participation of the companion characters is always constant, if the contents of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the number of times of participation, etc.) are determined, the type and the aura of the companion character corresponding thereto are obtained. The number is uniquely determined. Friend participation effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which one friend character A participates in the battle and acquires one aura. The friend participation effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which one friend character B participates in the battle and acquires one aura. The friend participation effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern in which one friend character C enters the battle and acquires one aura. A friend participation effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern in which two friend characters A and B simultaneously participate in the battle and acquire two auras. A friend participation effect pattern 5 is an effect pattern in which two friend characters B and C simultaneously participate in the battle and acquire two auras.

  Here, in the case where one fellow character participates in the battle, the fellow character B does not participate in the battle before the fellow character A according to the above-mentioned battle order (the fellow participation production is performed earlier than the fellow participation production pattern 1). The pattern 2 is never selected), and the friend character C does not participate before the friend character B (the friend participation effect pattern 3 is not selected before the friend participation effect pattern 2). . Therefore, in the first friend entry performance, at least the friend character A always participates in the battle regardless of the number of participants. In other words, in the first friend entry production, either the friend character A participates in the battle or the friend characters A and B participate simultaneously.

  At this time, when a plurality of companion participation effects are performed during one change display, in the second companion participation production, among the plurality of companion characters A, B, and C, in the first companion participation production, Only the remaining companion characters excluding the participating companion characters can participate in the battle. That is, in the case where one friend character participates in the first friend entry production (only the friend character A participates in the battle), the friend characters B and C can participate in the second friend entry production. Then, when one friend character participates in the second friend entry production, the friend character B (the friend character in the order of participation is the first) participates in the battle, and in the second friend entry production, two friend characters simultaneously appear. In the case of human participation, the friend characters B and C (remaining friend characters) will participate in the war. On the other hand, when two fellow characters participate in the first fellow participation production at the same time (when the fellow characters A and B participate), only the remaining one fellow character (the fellow character C) in the second fellow participation production Will participate.

連結 Aura linked production≫
The aura connected effect is an effect in which, when a plurality of auras are held as a result of the friend participation effect, the plurality of auras are connected and displayed. That is, the execution condition of the aura connection effect is that the number of auras held is plural (two or three). Therefore, when the number of possessed auras is one, the execution conditions of the aura connected effect are not satisfied, and the aura connected effect is not performed. The “number of auras” means the number of auras currently displayed around the friend icon. Therefore, even if the number of auras obtained in the above-mentioned companion participation production is plural, if the aura is used in the aura-using production described later, the number of auras used will be calculated from the number of auras held. Removed. That is, “aura holding number” = “aura acquisition number” − “aura usage number”. Even if the number of auras held is one, if one or two more auras are acquired without using this one aura, if the number of auras held becomes more than one, , An aura connected effect is executed.

As described above, there are two types of aura connection effects: a warrior connection effect and an ultimate connection effect. The warrior connection effect is an effect in which the two auras are connected and displayed when the number of auras held becomes two. The ultimate connected effect is an effect in which the three auras are connected and displayed when the number of auras held becomes three. However, even if a plurality of auras are linked and displayed, the number of auras held remains unchanged (that is, even if a plurality of auras are linked and displayed together, the number of auras is not changed). The number of holdings is not one). Therefore, the number of auras held is two when the aura is in the twin connection state, and three when the aura is in the ultimate connection state. Here, when the musou connected effect is executed (when the aura is in the musou connected state), the result (true pseudo simulated result) is always obtained when the pseudo continuous fueling effect is re-executed in the aura using effect (re-challenge effect) described later. The result is that the continuous production is a successful production), and it is determined that the next pseudo fluctuation will be performed. On the other hand, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), the pseudo-running effect described later does not fail, and three pseudo-runs are determined. Further, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), it is deterministic that the SP reach C with high expectation is developed.

  FIG. 26 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an aura connection effect pattern table in the present embodiment. In the aura connection effect pattern table, a plurality of types of aura connection effect patterns are defined. In the aura connection effect patterns 1 and 2, the type of the aura connection state (musou connection, ultimate connection) and the type of the fellow character having the connection target aura are associated with each other. In the present embodiment, an aura connected battle effect pattern according to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (the detailed effect pattern of the special effect) is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, if the contents of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the type of the aura connection effect, etc.) are determined, the corresponding aura connection effect pattern is uniquely determined. The aura connection effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which the auras of the two ally characters A and B are connected and displayed, and the connection is in a state of no match. The aura connection effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the auras of three ally characters A, B, and C are connected and displayed, and an ultimate connection state is established. As a modification of the present embodiment, an effect pattern may be prepared in which the auras of two ally characters A, C or B, C are in a muscular connected state.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, an example of the production of the friend participation production and the aura connection production will be described. In FIG. 27, reference numerals are omitted for the sake of space.

  FIGS. 27 (A1) and 27 (A2) show an example of an effect in a case where an aura-connected effect is not performed. In this effect example, first, a friend character A participates as shown in (A1) in the figure. Subsequently, as shown in (A2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the friend icon 733 corresponding to the friend character A, and one aura is acquired. At this point, since the number of auras held is one, the aura linked effect is not executed.

  FIGS. 27 (B1) to (B3) are examples of effects in a case where a warrior connected effect is performed. In this effect example, first, as shown in (B1) in the figure, in a state where an aura is displayed on the friend icon 733 corresponding to the friend character A (a state in which the friend character A has already participated in the war), B participates. Subsequently, as shown in (B2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the friend icon 734 corresponding to the friend character B, and the number of held auras becomes two. Next, as shown in (B3) in the figure, when the number of possessed auras becomes two, an aura connection effect (musou connection state) occurs, and the auras of the friend icons 733 and 734 are connected and displayed.

FIGS. 27 (C1) to (C3) are examples of effects in a case where an ultimate connected effect is performed. In this effect example, first, as shown in (C1) in the figure, a state in which an aura is displayed on the buddy icons 733 and 734 corresponding to the buddy characters A and B (the buddy characters A and B have already participated in the battle) In the state, the fellow character C enters the battle. Subsequently, as shown in (C2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the friend icon 735 corresponding to the friend character C, and the number of held auras becomes three. Next, as shown in (C3) in the figure, the aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) occurs when the number of possessed auras becomes three, and the auras of the friend icons 733, 734, and 735 are connected and displayed. In addition, in a state where the aura is displayed on the friend icon 733 corresponding to the friend character A (a state where the friend character A has already participated in the battle), the friend characters B and C participate in the battle and correspond to the friend characters B and C. An aura is displayed on the buddy icons 732 and 735, and the aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) may be generated when the number of auras held becomes three.

演 Direction using Aura ≫
Next, an aura-using effect will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of an aura use effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pseudo run is generated or continued, and as a result, the pseudo run is generated or continued (successful pseudo run) or the pseudo run is not generated or continued ( Before a fake rendition production (referred to as a "true fake rendition production") that definitely notifies or suggests either of the following: It is possible to do. The true pseudo-tanning effect corresponds to the pseudo-tanning (“pseudo-one fan”, “pseudo-two fan”) defined in the main fluctuation pattern or the sub fluctuation pattern in FIGS. This aura-use production is a pre-production of a true pseudo-tanning production (pseudo-1 panting, pseudo-2 panning), and is a simulated pseudo-series that always results in failure of pseudo-panning regardless of the progress of the game. It is configured to include a stir effect (referred to as a "fake pseudo-stirring effect") and a re-challenge effect that attempts to redo the pseudo-stirring after the fake pseudo-stirring effect is performed. This aura-using production is performed as if the pseudo pseudo-tanning production (the previous pseudo-panning production) followed by the true pseudo-panning production (later pseudo-pan production). It is a production to make it look as if the production has been redone. That is, in the present embodiment, in order to show the true pseudo-running production defined on the main fluctuation pattern or the sub fluctuation pattern as a pseudo pseudo-running production again, before executing the true pseudo-running production, An aura-use production (fake pseudo-tanning production) is interrupted.

  Here, FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the pseudo continuous fanning effect. (A1) to (A5) in the figure show an example of an effect in the case where the pseudo-running is successful, and (B1) to (B5) in the figure show an example of an effect in the case where the pseudo-running fails. Pseudo continuous fanning effect (true pseudo continuous fanning effect, fake pseudo continuous fanning effect) is a three-row decorative design in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and then the pseudo symbol symbol is displayed as the middle symbol. This is an effect that slowly moves downward from and displays whether or not a pseudo-sequence is generated based on whether or not the pseudo-sequence symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The pseudo continuous symbol is a special symbol (referred to as a “NEXT symbol”) composed of characters “NEXT” as identification elements of the decorative symbol. The types of the pseudo continuous fanning effects are broadly classified into fanning success effects and fanning failure effects. As shown in (A1) to (A5) in the figure, the successful successful production is that the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and then the pseudo continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. This is an effect suggesting that a pseudo fluctuation is performed. In the present embodiment, the fanning success effect is not performed as a false pseudo fanning effect, and the fanning success effect can be performed only in the true pseudo fanning effect. On the other hand, as shown in (B1) to (B5) in the figure, after the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is not temporarily stopped as the middle symbol. This is an effect suggesting that no pseudo fluctuation is performed. In the present embodiment, a fanning failure effect is always performed in a false pseudo fanning effect, and a fanning failure effect can also be performed in a true pseudo fanning effect. In the case where the true pseudo-tanning effect is performed as a fanning failure effect, after the NEXT symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed (after the NEXT symbol slides from top to bottom), another decoration different from the left symbol or the right symbol is performed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed as a middle symbol, it becomes “out of shape”. On the other hand, if the fake pseudo-tanning effect is performed as a fanning failure effect, after the NEXT symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, only the middle symbol continues scrolling, leading to the re-challenge effect described below. become.

  In the present embodiment, a false repetition effect is performed after a fake pseudo-tanning effect (fanning failure effect) is performed as an aura-using effect. Then, after the re-challenge effect has been performed, a true pseudo-reinforcement effect (a successful success effect or a failed effect effect) is performed. As described above, of the two pseudo-tanning productions, the false pseudo-tanning production is always an unsuccessful production result, and the true pseudo-tanning production production is a successful production or a failure production. It is determined whether or not the next pseudo fluctuation is performed. In addition, whether the true pseudo continuous fanning effect is a fanning success effect or a fanning failure effect is determined in advance according to the selected main fluctuation pattern (or sub fluctuation pattern) as shown in FIGS. I have decided. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-reinforcement production is performed twice before and after the re-challenge production, and even if the pseudo-reinforcement production fails once, it is re-executed. Expectation can be raised, and the joy of performing the pseudo-run can be further improved.

  The re-challenge effect is an effect for re-executing the pseudo-sequence production using the aura acquired in the above-mentioned companion participation production after the fake pseudo-sequence production (fault failure production). This re-challenge effect can be executed when one or more auras acquired in the companion participation production are held, and will not be performed without going through the companion participation production (without acquiring an aura). . In other words, the execution condition of the re-challenge effect (effect using the aura) is that the player currently has one or more auras. Therefore, even if an aura is acquired in the companion participation production, if the aura is no longer possessed because the aura has already been used (the number of auras held is 0), a re-challenge production (aura production production) Is not done. If the number of auras held is three (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), the re-challenge production (production using the aura) is not performed (the pseudo-reinduction production fails even once) No), the occurrence of three pseudo runs is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, the re-challenge effect (aura-use effect) is performed only when the number of auras held is one or two.

  In this re-challenge effect, specifically, a predetermined companion character (referred to as a “re-challenge character”) among the three companion characters uses (consumes) its own aura and performs a specific attack technique (normally). Technique or special technique). In accordance with the type of the re-challenge effect (the type of the attack technique), the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of the succession of the pseudo-sequence success) that the subsequent pseudo-stirring effect becomes a success effect is suggested. The above-mentioned “re-challenge character” means, among the ally characters having an aura, the ally character that has participated most recently (a ally character that is late in the order of participation). Therefore, if the re-challenge effect is performed when the number of auras held is one, the ally character having the aura becomes the re-challenge character, and the re-challenge effect is performed when the number of auras held is two. In this case, of the two ally characters having each aura, the ally character whose participation order is later becomes the re-challenge character. Then, when the aura of the re-challenge character is used in the re-challenge effect, the aura of the re-challenge character disappears, so that the number of auras held is reduced by one. In this way, when the above-mentioned companion participation effect is performed, the number of auras corresponding to the number of participating competitor characters increases, whereas when the aura-use production is performed, one aura of the re-challenge character is changed. Will be subtracted.

The types of aura-use productions (re-challenge productions) are broadly classified into normal aura-use productions and special aura-use productions. The normal aura use effect is an effect in which, when the number of auras held is one (when the aura is in an unconnected state), the re-challenge character releases a normal attack technique (referred to as “normal technique”). . The special aura use effect is an effect in which, when the number of auras held is two (when the aura is in a state of connection with no match), the re-challenge character fires a special attack technique (referred to as “special technique”). . At this time, if the production using the normal aura is performed, it is not determined whether the true pseudo-tanning production will be a successful production or a failed production. On the other hand, when a special aura use effect is performed as an aura use effect, it is determined that the true pseudo-tanning effect is a fantastic success effect. At this time, the special aura use effect is an effect in which when the aura is in a warrior connected state (a state in which the auras of two fellow characters are connected), the aura of the ally character whose order of participation is later is used. The fellow character A among the plurality of fellow characters does not become the re-challenge character. When the aura is in the musou connected state, if a special aura use effect is performed and one aura is used (the number of auras held is reduced to one), the musou connected state is released. .

  FIG. 26C is a schematic diagram illustrating an aura-use effect pattern table. In this aura use effect pattern table, a plurality of types of aura use effect patterns are set, and the type of the re-challenge character and the type of the attack technique are associated with each aura use effect pattern. The aura use effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character A uses “normal technique 1” as the attack technique. The aura-use effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character B uses “normal technique 2” as the attack technique. The aura-use effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character C uses “normal technique 3” as the attack technique. The aura use effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character B uses the “special technique” as the attack technique. In the present embodiment, an aura-use effect pattern corresponding to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (the detailed effect pattern of the special effect) is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, if the contents of the sub-variation addition pattern (the number of participants, the type of the aura-connected effect, the order of the aura-use effect, and the like) are determined, the corresponding aura-use effect pattern is uniquely determined.

  Next, an example of an effect using an aura will be described. FIGS. 28 (A1) to (A5) are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in the case where a normal aura-use effect is performed. FIGS. FIG.

  First, a description will be given of a production example of a production using a normal aura. The pseudo continuous fanning effect of (A1) in the figure is a false pseudo fanning effect, and the pseudo continuous fanning effects of (A4) and (A5) in the drawing are true pseudo continuous fanning effects.

  First, as shown in (A1) in the figure, the previous pseudo continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning failure effect, does not progress to the next pseudo fluctuation, and only the middle symbol out of the three rows of decorative symbols is changed (scroll) Display).

  As shown in (A2) in the figure, the aura of the friend icon 733 corresponding to the current re-challenge character (friend character A) emits a strong light, and the re-challenge character (friend character A) is materialized and displayed.

  As shown in (A3) in the figure, it is suggested that the re-challenge character (companion character A) releases the normal technique to perform the pseudo-reincarnation again. In addition, in the case of redoing the pseudo-tanning production by the normal technique, it is not determined whether the production will be a successful production or a failure production.

  As shown in (A4) in the figure, when a successful fanning effect is performed as a true pseudo-tanning effect, it is suggested that the next pseudo fluctuation is performed. On the other hand, as shown in (A5) in the figure, when a fanning failure effect is performed as a true pseudo-tanning effect, it is suggested that the next pseudo fluctuation is not performed. In addition, as shown in (A4) and (A5) in the figure, the aura of the friend icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (friend character A) disappears at substantially the same time as the true pseudo-running effect is performed.

  Next, an example of a special aura production effect will be described. The pseudo continuous fanning effect in (B1) in the figure is a false pseudo fanning effect, and the pseudo continuous fanning effect in (B4) in the figure is a true pseudo fanning effect.

  First, as shown in (B1) in the figure, the previous pseudo continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning failure effect, does not progress to the next pseudo fluctuation, and only the middle symbol of the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuates (scroll). Display). At this time, the auras of the friend icons 733 and 734 corresponding to the friend characters A and B are in a state of being connected together.

  As shown in (B2) in the figure, the aura of the companion icon 734 corresponding to the current re-challenge character (companion character B) among the companion characters A and B emits a strong light, and this re-challenge character (companion character B) Is materialized and displayed.

  As indicated by (B3) in the figure, it is suggested that the re-try of the pseudo-reincarnation is performed when the materialized re-challenge character (companion character B) releases the special technique. In addition, in the case of retrying the pseudo continuous fueling by the special technique, it is determined that the fueling is a successful performance (it is determined that the next pseudo fluctuation is advanced).

  As shown in (B4) in the figure, as a retry of the pseudo continuous fueling effect, a subsequent pseudo continuous fueling effect (in the illustrated example, a successful fueling effect) is performed. Note that the aura of the friend icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (the friend character B) disappears at almost the same time as the true pseudo-running effect is performed.

  Subsequently, other characteristic configurations applied in the special effect of the present embodiment or its modified example will be described. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of pseudo runs, the higher the expectation of big hits. The larger the aura (the larger the number of remaining auras), the more likely the number of pseudo runs to be, and the larger the number of companions, the higher the expected SP. It is designed to increase the jackpot expectation to make it easy to reach. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram for explaining another characteristic configuration 1 of the special effect, and FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram for explaining another characteristic structure 2 of the special effect. As described above, the flow of the main fluctuation addition pattern and the flow of the special effect are not limited to the types shown in FIG. 18 in order to realize more various effects. May be provided. Here, FIG. 30 (A) shows a flow of a plurality of patterns of variable production including a flow of a variable production corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 3 (a production of two companions, a warrior connected production, and a production using a special aura). FIG. 30 (B) shows a plurality of patterns including a flow of a variable production corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 4 (two-man participation participation production → musou connected production → special aura production production → normal aura production production). It shows the flow of the variable production (branch of production). FIG. 31 (A) shows a flow of a variation effect (branch of the effect) of a plurality of patterns including a variation effect flow corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 3 or 4, and FIG. 31 (B) shows the main variation addition. FIG. 31 (C) shows a flow of a variable effect corresponding to the main fluctuation additional pattern 5 or 7, showing a flow of a variable effect of a plurality of patterns including a flow of the variable effect corresponding to the pattern 6 (branch of the effect). It shows the flow of multiple patterns of variable production (branch of production).

(Other characteristic configuration 1)
As another characteristic configuration 1, in a situation where a no-muscle connection state has occurred (two auras are held), depending on whether or not the pseudo-rendition production succeeds without using an aura, It is configured so that the degree of expectation of succeeding in the next pseudo-tanning production is different. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), in a situation where the pseudo-1 fluctuation has started and the no-muscle connection state has occurred, if the pseudo-rendition effect (pseudo-1 invocation) succeeds without using an aura, the pseudo Since the warrior connection state is maintained at the start of the second fluctuation, regardless of whether or not to go through the re-challenge effect (whether or not to repeat the pseudo-sequence production effect), the next pseudo-seated production effect (pseudo-2 production) It will be determined that it will be successful even in the case of bullying. In other words, when the warrior connection state occurs at the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, (a) a route that succeeds in the pseudo 2 panning without hitting the pseudo rendition production once, and After the failure, by performing the redoing by the re-challenge effect, it will progress to one of the routes that succeeds in the pseudo-tanning effect (it is determined to develop into a pseudo-three change). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), in a situation where the pseudo-1 fluctuation has started and the no-muscle connection state has occurred, the result of using the aura for the pseudo-rendination effect (pseudo-1 indication) is successful (pseudo-consecutive effect). If the masturbation production fails once, and the pseudo-competition production is succeeded by retrying with the re-challenge production, the Musou connection state is released at that point (the Musou connection state is released at the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation) Therefore, it is uncertain whether or not the next pseudo-sequence production (pseudo-two production) will succeed. That is, if the no-muscle connection state is released at the start of the pseudo-2 fluctuation (the number of auras held becomes one), (a) the pseudo-two fanning succeeds in one shot without redoing the pseudo-rendling production (A) A route that succeeds in pseudo-tanning production by failing once in the pseudo-tanning production, and then re-executes through a re-challenge production. Even if the re-execution is performed, it will progress to one of the routes in which the pseudo-tanning effect fails (it will be uncertain to develop into a pseudo-3 change). Therefore, in the situation where the warrior connection state occurs (two auras are held), the aura is not used for the pseudo-rendition production than in the case of success as a result of using the aura for the pseudo-rendition production. Is more likely to continue the pseudo-run (in the example shown, three pseudo-runs are uncertain in the former case (B) and three pseudo-runs in the latter case (A)). The number of remaining auras is relatively large (in the illustrated example, 0 to 1 auras remain in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 in the case of the latter (A)). It can be said that the expectation of the big hit increases accordingly. That is, in the present embodiment, the pseudo hit is relatively higher than the non-pseudo run, and in the case of the pseudo run, the larger the pseudo run is (the more it is continued), the higher the hit expectation is. With such a configuration, maintaining the Musou connected state at a predetermined timing (in the above example, at the timing of the pseudo-running effect in the pseudo 1 variation) means that the Musou connected state is maintained at the predetermined timing. Will be higher than expected.

(Other characteristic configuration 2)
As another characteristic configuration 2, the number of participating companion characters in the variable display is the same (two) in a case where the one-man friend participation production is performed twice and a case where the two-member participation production is performed once. However, the case where two companion characters participate in one battle with one fellow character is more effective than the case where two companion characters participate in one battle with one friend. In addition, the big hit expectation of the variable display is configured to be relatively high. It is preferable that such a configuration be made in an effect pattern in which the friend participation effect is performed once during the pseudo 2 change, and the friend participation effect is not performed or only once during the pseudo 1 change. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the case where a two-man participation battle effect is performed once in the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the number of auras held at that time becomes two, and a muscular connection state occurs, so a re-challenge is performed. Regardless of whether or not to go through the effect (whether or not to repeat the pseudo-tanning effect), it is determined that the next pseudo-tanning effect (pseudo-2 fanning) will succeed. In other words, if a two-member participation production performance is performed once and a warrior connection state occurs (when the number of auras becomes two), (a) pseudo two-level propulsion without re-doing (A) After failing once in the pseudo-tanning production, re-executing the re-challenge production leads to one of the following routes: Will be developed). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and (C), when the one-man friend participation effect is performed twice from the pseudo 1 change to the pseudo 2 change, the first friend one-man participation effect and the 2 Depending on whether or not a re-challenge effect (redo of the pseudo-rendition effect) intervenes between the first companion performance and the first companion production, the presence or absence of the no-muscle connection state differs, and the subsequent results will differ. . For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), after the first friend one-man participation effect is performed in the pseudo one change, if the pseudo one fanning succeeds in one shot without redoing the pseudo continuous fanning effect, the pseudo two fanning is performed. At the time of the second all-in-one participation production in the fluctuation, the number of auras held becomes two and a warrior connection state occurs, so after that whether or not to go through a re-challenge production ( Regardless of whether or not redoing is performed), it is determined that the next pseudo continuous fueling effect (pseudo two fueling) will succeed. In other words, when the warrior connection state occurs due to the participation of one friend participating twice (when the number of auras held is two), (a) the pseudo-two-in-one effect without re-doing the pseudo-induction effect (A) After failing once in the pseudo-tanning production, re-executing the re-challenge production leads to one of the following routes: Will be developed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), after the first one-man participation performance in the pseudo 1 change was performed, success was achieved as a result of using the aura for the pseudo rendition production (pseudo 1 generation) (pseudo repetition). After failing to create the aura once, and succeeding in the simulated continuous arousal production by retrying with the re-challenge effect, the number of auras held at that point becomes zero. Then, even if the second round of one-man participation production is performed in the pseudo 2 change, the number of auras held is only one at that time, and the no-muscle connection state does not occur, so the next pseudo continuous tandem production (pseudo production) 2) It is uncertain whether it will succeed. In other words, if the warrior connection state does not occur even if the one-man participation performance is performed twice (when the number of auras held is one), (a) the pseudo-two-pumping without re-doing the pseudo-pumping production A route that succeeds in one shot, (a) A route that succeeds in pseudo-tanning production by failing once in the pseudo-rendan production, and then a redone by retrying the production, (c) After a failure in pseudo-tanning production once However, even if a retry is performed by a re-challenge effect, the process will progress to one of the routes in which the simulated staggering effect fails (it will be uncertain to develop into a pseudo-three change). As described above, when the one-man participation battle effect is performed twice between the pseudo 1 change and the pseudo 2 change, depending on whether or not a re-challenge effect (redo of the pseudo continuous fanning effect) is interposed therebetween. The result of the next pseudo-sequence production (pseudo-two production) will change. Therefore, when the friend character participates in the battle twice and the friend character participates two times, the pseudo character is more simulated than when the friend character participates in the battle two times. It is highly probable that the run will continue (in the example shown, three pseudo-runs are uncertain in the former case (B) and three pseudo-runs are determinate in the latter case (A)), and the remaining aura Is relatively large (in the illustrated example, 0 to 2 auras remain in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 auras remain in the case of the latter (A)). It can be said that the jackpot expectation also increases. In the lottery process of the main variation adding pattern in the present embodiment, the main variation adding pattern for the big hit is set as the main variation adding pattern corresponding to the main variation adding pattern in which the no-muscle connection state does not occur. , 7 are more likely to be selected as the main variation adding patterns 3, 4, 6, and 8 in which the muscular connected state occurs. The main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 5, 7 in which the no-split connection state does not occur may be configured to be more easily selected than the main variation addition patterns 3, 4, 6, 8 in which occurs. According to such a configuration, two companion performances are performed once, compared to a case where two companion characters participate in the performance by performing one companion participation performance twice (when the occurrence of the warrior connection state is not determined). It can be said that the big hit expectation is relatively higher when two fellow characters participate in the war (when the occurrence of the warrior connection state is determined). It should be noted that the type of SP reach suggested when the one friend participation production is performed twice and the type of SP reach suggested when the two friend participation production is performed once are the same (SP reach B). Above). In other words, even when the one friend participation production is performed twice and the two friend participation production is performed once, the SP reach A does not develop (the SP reach that denies the development is the same). ), Evolving into SP reach B or SP reach C. However, it is easier to develop SP reach (SP reach C) with a higher degree of expectation when the two-man participation performance is performed once than when the one-man participation performance is performed twice. .

  As a modification of the present embodiment, a special character (referred to as a “specific character”) other than the friend characters A to C is prepared, and the specific characters other than the friend characters A to C are also included in the friend entry performance. You may be comprised so that it may participate. If a specific character participates in the battle, the specification may be such that it is determined that the game will develop into the SP heat E of the intense heat with a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach A to C. Further, when a specific character participates in the battle, an aura corresponding to the specific character may not be displayed, and an aura-using effect may not be executed (the pseudo-running may not fail). .

[Pending Change Direction]
The hold change effect is to change the display mode of the hold image or the changing image corresponding to the operation hold ball (trigger hold) targeted for the look-ahead lottery, so that the change display when the trigger hold is consumed is a big hit. This is an effect that suggests or informs the possibility of becoming a notice in advance. In the present embodiment, the holding change effect is a holding image change effect of changing the holding image displayed in the holding image display area 710, and a changing image change effect of changing the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720. Having. In the following, without distinguishing the two, simply referred to as a pending change effect, the pending change effect that changes the reserved image may be referred to as the reserved image change effect as described above, or the image during the change The suspended change effect may be referred to as a changing image effect as described above.

  FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram for explaining a suspended image display area 710 and a changing image display area 720 in the present embodiment. As described above, the reserved image display area 710 for displaying the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is provided in the lower area in the screen of the effect display device 70. In the reserved image display area 710, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol that is the main player of the game in the currently executing game state among the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is displayed. That is, when the currently executed game state is the normal game state or the latent game state, the change display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol Is displayed. On the other hand, when the game state currently being executed is the time saving game state or the probable change game state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so that the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. Each reservation image is displayed in order according to the order of generation of the special design operation suspension balls (order of entry).

  The reserved image display area 710 is provided with four individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 corresponding to the upper limit value of the operation reserved balls of each special symbol. The individual reserved image display area 711 corresponds to the reserved image of the reserved 1 (first reserved), the individual reserved image display area 712 corresponds to the reserved image of the reserved 2 (second reserved), and the individual reserved image display area 713. Corresponds to the hold image of hold 3 (third hold), and the individual hold image display area 714 corresponds to the hold image of hold 4 (fourth hold). The individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 are each configured as a display area of the same size, and can each display one reserved image.

  On the left side of the suspended image display area 710, a moving image display area 720 for displaying a moving image corresponding to the special design operation suspended ball digested by the variable display is provided. In the changing image display area 720, a changing image corresponding to the changing display of the special symbol that is the main player of the game in the currently executing game state among the changing displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the currently executed game state is the normal game state or the latent game state, the change display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the changing image corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the game state currently being executed is the time-saving game state or the probable changing game state, the changing display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the changing image corresponding to the changing display of the second special symbol is Is displayed. The changing image display area 720 is configured as a display area having a larger size than the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714.

In the reserved image display area 710, each time an operation reserved ball of a special symbol is generated, one reserved image is displayed in order from the individual reserved image display area 711 on the left (the reserved images of the reserved 1, reserved 2, reserved 3, and reserved 4). ) Is additionally displayed. In addition, every time the operation holding ball of the special symbol is consumed, the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720 disappears, and the holding image (hold) displayed in the individual holding image display areas 711 to 714 is displayed. 1, hold 2, hold 3, and hold 4) move to the left image display area one by one. Here, the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 are digested in order from the left, and the earliest reserved image (the reserved image of the reserve 1) displayed in the individual reserved image display area 711 is digested. Then, the reserved image moves to the changing image display area 720, is displayed as a changing image corresponding to the changing display, and is continuously displayed until the end of the changing display. However, in a situation where a specific effect has occurred, such as after the development of the SP reach effect, the suspended image and the changing image may be hidden, in which case, upon completion of the specific effect, The background effect before evolving to the SP reach effect, for example, when staying in the normal mode, when returning to the background effect corresponding to the normal mode), the suspended image and the changing image are displayed again. The end of the variable display ends the display of the changing image, and the suspended image is continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. Further, as a modified example, even in a situation where a specific effect is occurring, such as after the SP reach effect has been developed, the suspended image and the changing image may be continuously displayed. In that case, the change display ends. As a trigger, the display of the changing image may be terminated, and the suspended image may be continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. Further, as another modified example, if a specific effect is occurring, such as after the SP reach effect has been developed, the pending image may be hidden, and the image during the change may be continuously displayed, In this case, the end of the specific effect (as a background effect before developing into the SP reach effect, for example, when returning to the background effect corresponding to the normal mode when in the normal mode, for example), The reserved image is displayed again, and the display of the image during the change is terminated when the variable display ends, while the reserved image is continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display ends. May be. Here, in the present embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the display time of the image during the change may be made different according to the degree of expectation of the change display. With such a configuration, in addition to the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous production, the number of pseudo consecutive productions, the presence or absence of the SP reach production, and the type of the SP reach production, it is also possible to estimate the big hit expectation by paying attention to the changing image. it can. Here, by focusing attention not only on the type of the changing image but also on the display time thereof, in addition to the display mode of the notice effect, there is a sense of expectation for a different display time of the notice effect from the conventional one. be able to. In addition, the display specifications (including those described as modified examples) of the above-mentioned suspended image and the changing image are changed to other game states (other than the low-probability low-base state) in order to unify the appearance of the game and the effect. May be applied, or conversely, in order to diversify the appearance of the game and the effect, it may be applied only in the low probability low base state, and may not be applied in other game states.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of suspended images and changing images are prepared for each effect mode, and the type of suspended image and the changing image according to the effect mode currently being executed are displayed. That is, the pending image and the changing image are images exclusive for each effect mode, which are different from each other in the normal mode (special mode), the suppression chance mode, the fantasy fight rush mode, and the revenge mode. Hereinafter, the hold image in the normal mode is referred to as “hold image HA”, the changing image is referred to as “change image HB”, the hold image in the suppression chance mode is “hold image Ha”, and the changing image is referred to as “change image”. Hb ".

  In the present embodiment, a changing image is created as a reference image (original image), and a reduced image obtained by scaling the changing image is generated as a reserved image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing a drawing process or the like for displaying the reserved image, the changing image is read from the image data memory as the reference image data (original image data), and the reference image data is reduced. The image data is used as a reserved image. Specifically, an image obtained by reducing the number of pixels (the number of pixels) forming the changing image at a predetermined reduction ratio (also referred to as an “image reduction ratio”) in both the horizontal and vertical directions as viewed from the player. Configure as a pending image. For example, if the number of pixels in the horizontal direction is “N” and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is “M”, and the reduction rate is “1 / X (where X> 1)”, the reserved image The number of pixels in the horizontal direction is “N / X”, and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is “M / X”. In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the suspended image with respect to the changing image is set to be different for each effect mode. Here, that the reduction ratio “1 / X” is large is defined as that “1/100” has a larger reduction ratio than “1/10”, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio “1 / X2” of the suspended image Ha with respect to the fluctuating image Hb in the suppression chance mode is greater than the reduction ratio “1 / X2” of the suspended image HA with respect to the fluctuating image HB in the normal mode. It is configured to be large. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the reduction ratio of the suspended image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode is “1 / X1 = 1 / 1.18”, and the suspended image HA is the same as the changing image HB. The display size is reduced to about 85%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39, the reduction ratio of the suspended image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is “1 / X2 = 1 / 1.33”, and the suspended image Ha is approximately 75 times smaller than the changing image Hb. It is reduced to the display size of%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image size difference between the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is larger than the image size difference between the hold image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode. It is getting bigger. Note that the image size difference refers to a difference in the relative size of the suspended image with respect to the image during the change.

  As a modification, the reduction ratio “1 / X1” of the suspended image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode is set to be larger than the reduction ratio of the suspended image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. You may comprise. That is, the image size difference between the suspended image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode may be larger than the image size difference between the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. .

<Normal mode pending image / image during change>
When the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode (including the special mode), “normal display mode” and “special display mode” are set as the display modes of the hold image HA and the changing image HB. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram for explaining the hold image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of an image is a circular icon that simulates a round shape, and the display color of the icon is white.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a circular mode in which the image shape is a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a round icon in which the shape of the image is a round shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow.

In the present embodiment, as the display modes of the hold image HA and the changing image HB, there are six types of normal display mode, special display mode 1, special display mode 2, special display mode 3, special display mode 4, and special display mode 5. Is set. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is a "white icon", the special display mode 1 is a "blue icon", the special display mode 2 is a "green icon", the special display mode 3 is a "red icon", and the special display mode. The mode 4 is also called a “gold icon”, and the special display mode 5 is also called a “rainbow icon”. In the drawing, six types of display modes of “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow” are displayed in the reserved image HA or the changing image HB in the above-described colors. It is expressed by adding the name of That is, in the drawing, the white image and the pending image HA and the fluctuating image HB of the white icon are represented by attaching the character of “white”, and the pending image HA and the fluctuating image HB of the blue icon are represented by attaching the character of “blue”. Are expressed, and the holding image HA and the changing image HB of the green icon are expressed by attaching the character of “green”, and the holding image HA and the image HB of the red icon are expressed by attaching the character of “red”. Then, the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the golden icon are represented by attaching the letters “gold”, and the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the rainbow icon are represented by attaching the letters “rainbow”. .

  Here, the display mode of the reserved image and the image during the change are related to the reliability (big hit expectation) that the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, and “white” <“blue” <“green” < It is set so that the big hit expectation increases one step at a time in the order of “red” <“gold” <“rainbow”. In other words, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is “big hit”, the held image or the changing image having the higher expectation of the big hit is more easily selected in the case of “big hit” than in the case of “miss”. Note that “rainbow color” means a premier display mode in which the jackpot win is determined. Therefore, when a “rainbow-colored” reserved image appears or changes to a “rainbow-colored” reserved image, it is assured that a big hit will be won in the variable display corresponding to the reserved image. In addition, when the changing image of “rainbow color” appears or changes to the changing image of “rainbow color”, it is assured that the big hit will be won in the changing display. Note that the display mode of the suspended image and the changing image may be represented by, for example, a shape, a size, a pattern, an operation (motion), or the like, instead of the display color.

  As described above, the hold change effect is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation in the change display by changing the display mode of the hold image HA or the changing image HB dedicated to the normal mode. In the present embodiment, in each variable display from a variable display when a trigger hold which is a form of a look-ahead lottery is generated to a variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted, a corresponding hold image HA or a variable image is displayed. The display mode of the image HB may change. Whether or not the hold change effect is executable is determined by a hold change look-ahead lottery using an effect lottery random number.

  FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing a pending change look-ahead lottery table in the normal mode. The hold change look-ahead lottery in the normal mode is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. The predetermined lottery timing is when a new special symbol operation holding ball is generated (at the time of starting winning). In the pending change look-ahead lottery, it is determined by lottery whether or not to perform the pending change effect, and when it is determined to perform the pending change effect, the pending change pattern is determined. The operation-holding ball to be subjected to the holding change look-ahead lottery is the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol generated by a new start winning. In other words, during the execution of the normal mode, the change display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, and therefore the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is a target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. Here, the execution condition of the hold change look-ahead lottery is that the pre-judgment result of the operation hold ball (trigger hold) of the first special symbol to be subjected to the look-ahead lottery is “big hit”, “N-reach out (N-reach type out) )) And "SP reach out (SP reach type out)". Therefore, when the pre-determination result of the trigger hold corresponds to “non-reach loss (non-reach type loss)”, it is excluded from the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 34, whether or not to execute the pending change prefetching effect is defined in the pending change prefetch lottery table. In the figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience, but in actuality, a determination number (lottery random number value) for deciding whether or not to execute the hold change look-ahead effect in accordance with the obtained lottery random number value Is set, and whether or not the execution of the pending change look-ahead effect is determined based on which determination number the random number value belongs to. In the drawing, any of “execute” and “non-execute” can be selected with respect to the result of the preliminary determination of the trigger hold (the jackpot, the SP reach out, and the N reach out) of the hold change prefetch lottery target. Is set so that the big hit expectation is higher when the pending change look-ahead effect is “executed” than when it is “non-executed”. . Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the larger the number of operation-holding balls, the higher the winning probability of the pending change prefetch lottery. Here, when it is determined in the hold change look-ahead lottery that the hold change effect is to be executed, a hold change pattern (a hold change pattern) in which a change scenario of the display mode of the hold image and the changing image is defined. Effect pattern) is determined by lottery.

  Subsequently, the hold change pattern in the normal mode will be described. FIGS. 35 to 38 are schematic diagrams showing the pending change pattern tables in the normal mode. 35 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 1, FIG. 36 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 2, FIG. 37 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 3, and FIG. Is set when trigger suspension occurs as suspension 4. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, numerical values to be provided for the lottery are omitted, but in reality, there is a table corresponding to the obtained preliminary determination information (acceptance / non-performance determination information and fluctuation pattern preliminary determination information). A determination number (range of the random number value) for determining the hold change pattern is set for the random number value, and the hold change pattern is determined based on which determination number the random number value belongs to. It is to be decided.

  A plurality of hold change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the hold change pattern table. The hold change pattern is a scenario in which the route of change in the display mode of the hold image HA and the changing image HB related to the trigger hold is defined. Based on this hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold image HA and the changing image HB is changed each time from the change display when the trigger hold occurs to the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted (when the hold occurs). , Hold 3 fluctuations, hold 2 fluctuations, hold 1 fluctuations, target fluctuations). The pending changes of the pending image HA and the fluctuating image HB occur at the timing of the start of each variable display (the period from the end of the previous variable display to the start of the current variable display). More specifically, this is a timing immediately after each reserved image is shifted to the next lower image display area due to the digestion of the first operation pending ball (however, it may be a timing immediately before the shift). . On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image changes at a predetermined timing during the changing display. The predetermined timing is any one of the start timing of the pseudo 1 change (the relevant change), the start timing of the pseudo 2 change, the start timing of the pseudo 3 change, the timing of reaching, and the timing of SP reach development. Timing.

  Here, in the figure, “at the time of occurrence of a hold” means the time of occurrence of a trigger hold (at the time of a winning start) targeted for the prefetch lottery. Therefore, the display mode (initial display mode) of the hold image HA displayed in the variable display at the time of occurrence of the trigger hold is set in the column of “when hold occurs”. In the drawing, “hold 3 change” indicates a change when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and “hold 2 change” indicates a change when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , “Hold 1 change” means a change display when trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and “target change” means a change display (trigger display) when trigger hold is exhausted. Therefore, the “hold 3 fluctuation” column shows the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3, and the “hold 2 fluctuation” column shows when the trigger hold is hold 2. In the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the change display of the “hold 1 change”, the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is the hold 1 and the display mode of the “target change” In the column, the display mode of the changing image HB displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted is set. In the present embodiment, a change in the display mode of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up), and the display mode is demoted (ranked down). Not included. The “promotion” includes a case where the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is promoted by one step per change (for example, a case where the display mode is changed from “blue” to “green”) by one step, There is a case where the display mode of the image HB during the change is promoted by two steps per one change (for example, a case where the display state is changed from “blue” to “red” by two steps).

Although the hold change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 35 to 38, the selectivity of the hold change pattern is different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit or information indicating a deviation. It is set as follows. First, in the pending change pattern, in principle, a selection rate (determination number) is allocated according to the final display mode of the changing image (pending image), and the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit. In the case (or the information indicating a long-term fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high), the final display mode is selected in the order of “blue” <“green” <“red” <“gold” Is set to be higher, the more the result of the pre-determination is information indicating a loss (or the information indicating a short-term fluctuation pattern in which the big hit expectation is relatively low), The final display mode is set so that the selection rate increases in the order of “gold” <“red” <“green” <“blue”. When the display mode of the hold image HA or the changing image HB is “rainbow color”, it is guaranteed that the big hit will be won by the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted. Therefore, the above-mentioned five display modes (final display mode) of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the determination as to whether or not the special symbol is successful is a big hit. The expectation of the big hit increases by one step in the order of “green” <“red” <“gold” <“rainbow”.

  Further, even when the final display mode of the changing image HB (reserved image HA) is the same display mode, the final display mode is changed to the final display mode through one-step promotion (ranking up). It is set so that the big hit expectation is higher when the display mode is changed to the final display mode through the two-stage promotion (ranking up). In other words, even if the final display mode of the changing image HB (reserved image HA) is the same, as the promotion width (the number of steps of promotion) until the display mode is changed, the big hit expectation increases. .

  Further, if the promotion width until the final display mode is changed is the same, the expectation of the big hit is set to be higher as the timing of the change is later. That is, as the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display mode) to the special display mode or the timing of changing from the lower special display mode to the upper special display mode becomes later, the big hit expectation becomes higher. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the display mode of the suspended image HA or the changing image HB does not change at an early timing in a plurality of fluctuation displays.

  In the present embodiment, a single promotion width is set to a maximum of two levels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single promotion width may be set to three or more levels. One promotion may be limited to only one step. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold image HA or the changing image HB changes only once during the execution of one change display. The display mode of the HA or the fluctuating image HB may be changed a plurality of times. In particular, in the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted, it is preferable that the display mode of the changing image HB be changed a plurality of times, that is, the hold image HA is changed during the execution of the single change display. Is one at most, but the number of times the display mode of the changing image HB changes a plurality of times during one execution of the variable display (for example, one to three changes). Is preferable. In addition, as a display mode of the changing image HB, a special display mode that is not set in the display mode of the hold image HA may be set. Further, as a modified example, if there are a first timing which is the first half of the fluctuating display and a second timing which is the second half of the fluctuating display as the timing at which the display mode of the fluctuating image HB can be changed, the second timing In such a case, the display mode of the image HB during the change may be changed so that the display mode is more likely to be changed to the display mode with a high degree of expectation. As an example, when the display mode of the fluctuating image HB at the start of the fluctuation is blue in the fluctuation display of 40 seconds at which the SP reach C is performed, and when the display mode changes at the first timing 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, Although the possibility of changing to green is high and the possibility of changing to red is low, if the change occurs at the second timing 25 seconds after the start of the change, the possibility of changing to green is low and the possibility of changing to red is high. You may make it high. In addition, the above-described specification of the change of the display mode (including the one described as a modified example) can be applied to other game states (other than the low-probability low-base state) in order to unify the appearance of the game and the effect. Conversely, on the contrary, in order to diversify the playability and appearance of the effect, the present invention may be applied only in the low probability low base state, and may not be applied in other game states.

<Suspended image / Fluctuating image in suppression chance mode>
When the effect mode currently being executed is the suppression chance mode, “normal display mode” and “special display mode” are set as the display mode of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character icon imitating a specific enemy character (so-called small fish character). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a special normal display mode (also referred to as a “specific display mode”) is prepared in addition to the normal normal display mode as a display mode of the fluctuating image Hb. I have. This specific display mode (special normal display mode) is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are displayed in the changing image display area 720 in a state of being superimposed on the front and rear (see FIG. 46 for details). The detailed contents of the specific display mode will be described later.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character A icon that imitates a specific character A (character of “subtle”). The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character B icon imitating a specific character B (character of “opportunity”). The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character C icon that imitates a specific character C (character of “hot”).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal display mode (including the specific display mode), the special display mode 1, the special display mode 2, and the special display mode 3 are set as the display modes of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb. ing. In the following, for convenience of description, the normal display mode is “character icon”, the special display mode 1 is “character A icon”, the special display mode 2 is “character B icon”, and the special display mode 3 is “character C icon”. Also called.

  Here, the display mode of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) that the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, and is “character icon” <“character A icon”. It is set such that the big hit expectation increases one step at a time in the order of <“character B icon” <“character C icon”. In other words, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is “big hit”, the held image or the changing image having the higher expectation of the big hit is more easily selected in the case of “big hit” than in the case of “miss”. The display mode of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb may be represented by, for example, a display color, a pattern, an operation (motion), or the like, instead of the shape of the image.

  As described above, the hold change effect is an effect that indicates the big hit expectation in the change display by changing the display mode of the hold image Ha or the changing image Hb dedicated to the suppression chance mode. In the present embodiment, in each variable display from the variable display when the trigger hold which is the form of the prefetch lottery is generated to the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted, the corresponding hold image Ha or the changing image is displayed. The display mode of the image Hb may change. Whether or not the hold change effect is executable is determined by a hold change look-ahead lottery using an effect lottery random number.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change look-ahead lottery table in the suppression chance mode. The hold change look-ahead lottery in the suppression chance mode is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. The predetermined lottery timing is when a new special symbol operation holding ball is generated (at the time of starting winning). In the pending change look-ahead lottery, it is determined by lottery whether or not to perform the pending change effect, and when it is determined to perform the pending change effect, the pending change pattern is determined. The operation-reserved ball to be subjected to the reservation change look-ahead lottery is an operation-reserved ball generated by a new start winning. Therefore, even when one or more operation-holding balls (preceding operation-holding balls) already exist, the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery is the newly generated operation-holding ball. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game (normal gaming state, latent game state), the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is a target of the holding change look-ahead lottery, In the gaming state where the variable display of the 2 special symbols is the main game (probably changing gaming state, time saving gaming state), the operation holding ball of the 2nd special symbol is the target of the holding change look-ahead lottery. The execution condition of the hold change look-ahead lottery is that the preliminary determination result of the operation hold ball (trigger hold) to be subjected to the look-ahead lottery corresponds to one of “big hit” and “miss”. Note that, in the suppression chance mode, "N-reach out (N-reach type out)" or "SP reach out (SP-reach type out)" is not set as the out type because of the use of battle specifications. Therefore, unlike the normal mode, when the result of the preliminary determination is “non-reach loss (non-reach type loss)”, it is a target of the hold change prefetch lottery.

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a pending change look-ahead lottery table in the suppression chance mode. In the pending change look-ahead lottery table, whether or not a pending change look-ahead effect can be executed is determined. In the figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience, but in actuality, a determination number (lottery random number value) for deciding whether or not to execute the hold change look-ahead effect in accordance with the obtained lottery random number value Is set, and whether or not the execution of the pending change look-ahead effect is determined based on which determination number the random number value belongs to. In the figure, a selection rate (such as “execute” or “non-execute”) can be selected with respect to the pre-judgment result (big hit, non-reach loss) of the trigger hold that is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. Judgment number) is assigned, and the case where the pending change look-ahead effect is "executed" is larger than the case of "executed" than "non-executed". Is set to be higher. Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the larger the number of operation-holding balls, the higher the winning probability of the pending change prefetch lottery. Here, when it is determined in the hold change look-ahead lottery that the hold change effect is to be executed, a hold change pattern (scenario for changing the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb) is defined. Pending change effect pattern) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the hold change pattern in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 41 to FIG. 44 are schematic diagrams showing the hold change pattern tables in the suppression chance mode. FIG. 41 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 1, FIG. 42 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 2, FIG. 43 is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 3, and FIG. Is set when trigger hold occurs as hold 4. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, numerical values to be provided for the lottery are omitted, but in reality, there is a table corresponding to the obtained preliminary determination information (acceptance / non-performance determination information and fluctuation pattern preliminary determination information). A determination number (range of the random number value) for determining the hold change pattern is set for the random number value, and the hold change pattern is determined based on which determination number the random number value belongs to. It is to be decided.

A plurality of hold change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the hold change pattern table. The hold change pattern is a scenario in which the route of change in the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb related to the trigger hold is defined. Based on this hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb is changed at each time from the change display when the trigger hold is generated to the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted (when the hold is generated). , Hold 3 fluctuations, hold 2 fluctuations, hold 1 fluctuations, and target fluctuations). The display mode of the suspended image Ha changes at the timing of the start of each variable display (at least a period from the end of the previous variable display to the start of the current variable display). More specifically, this is the timing immediately after each reserved image is shifted to the next lower image display area as the reserved image is consumed (however, it may be the timing immediately before the shift). On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image Hb changes at the start timing of the changing display.

  Here, in the figure, “at the time of occurrence of a hold” means the time of occurrence of a trigger hold (at the time of a winning start) targeted for the prefetch lottery. Therefore, the display mode (initial display mode) of the hold image displayed in the variable display at the time of occurrence of the trigger hold is set in the column “at the time of occurrence of hold”. In the drawing, “hold 3 change” indicates a change when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and “hold 2 change” indicates a change when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , “Hold 1 change” means a change display when trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and “target change” means a change display (trigger display) when trigger hold is exhausted. For this reason, the “hold 3 fluctuation” column shows the display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3, and the “hold 2 fluctuation” column shows when the trigger hold is hold 2. In the display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the change display of the “hold 1 change” column, the display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the change display when the trigger hold is hold 1 and the display mode of the “target change” In the column, the display mode of the changing image Hb displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted is set. In the present embodiment, a change in the display mode of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up) from the normal display mode to the special display mode, and the display mode is changed. Demotion (rank down) from the special display mode to the normal display mode is not included. In the present embodiment, the initial display mode of the hold image Ha at the time of occurrence of the hold (at the time of the start winning) is always the normal display mode (character icon). However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display mode of the hold image Ha at the time (at the time of the start winning prize) is a special display mode (character icon). That is, when a hold occurs (at the time of a winning start), the hold image Ha may suddenly appear in a special display mode (character icon).

  Although the pending change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 41 to 44, the selection rate of the pending change pattern is different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit or information indicating a deviation. It is set as follows. First, in the pending change pattern, a selection rate (determination number) is assigned in principle according to the final display mode of the changing image (pending image), and the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit. In the case (or the information indicating a long-term fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high), the final display mode is “character A icon” <“character B icon” <“character C icon” in this order. When the selection rate is set to be high, but the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a loss (or information indicating a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation) The final display mode is set so that the selection rate becomes higher in the order of “character C icon” <“character B icon” <“character A icon”. Therefore, the four types of display modes (final display mode) of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit. "<Character B icon> <Character C icon", and the big hit expectation increases one step at a time. It should be noted that the display mode for determining the big hit is not set in the display mode of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. However, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a special display mode (for example, a character icon imitating the character of “accurate”) for determining a big hit may be set.

  When the final display mode of the changing image Hb (reserved image Ha) is the same display mode, the expectation of a big hit is set to be higher as the change timing is later. That is, as the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display mode) to the special display mode is later, the big hit expectation is higher. Therefore, in a plurality of change displays, even if the display mode of the suspended image Ha and the changing image Hb does not change at an early timing, the player's expectation can be maintained.

Note that, in the suppression chance mode, unlike the above-described normal mode, the number of holding changes performed in one or a plurality of changing displays is only one, and the holding image Ha or the changing image Hb
Is set only when the display mode changes from the normal display mode to any of the special display modes 1 to 4. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved image Ha or the changing image Hb does not change from the lower special display mode to the upper special display mode. That is, when the display mode of the suspended image Ha or the changing image Hb is changed to any one of a plurality of types of special display modes 1 to 4, the special display mode is changed to the final display mode. Become. Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image Ha may be changed a plurality of times in one or more variable displays. In this case, unlike the normal mode described above, it is preferable that the number of changes is smaller than that in the normal mode even if the change is made a plurality of times (the display mode of the reserved image Ha is one or more times). In the case of multiple changes in the variable display, it is preferable that the maximum number of changes in the normal mode is larger than the maximum number of changes in the suppression chance mode.)

  Here, when a specific hold change pattern is selected from the plurality of types of hold change patterns, a special hold change effect that does not appear in any other scene (effect mode) is performed. The “specific hold change pattern” is a hold change pattern in which a hold change occurs in the change display (target change). Specifically, ID numbers “1-1”, “1-2”, “1-3”, “2-1”, “2-3”, “2-5”, “3-1”, The pending change patterns are “3-4”, “3-7”, “4-1”, “4-5”, and “4-9”. In the special hold change effect, in the variable display from the occurrence of the trigger hold to the digestion (variable display until reaching the variable display), each time the preceding operation-holding ball is digested, the changing image Hb is displayed. Is changed to a special normal display mode (specific display mode) different from the normal normal display mode. The specific display mode is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are displayed in an overlapping state, unlike a normal display mode (a display mode in which one character icon is displayed alone). Hereinafter, for convenience of description, a display mode in which two character icons are displayed in a superimposed state is referred to as “specific display mode 2”, and a display mode in which three character icons are displayed in a superimposed state is referred to as “specific display mode 3”. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect of the hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect of a hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. In the present effect example, the effect mode is the suppression chance mode, and the hold image Ha corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is displayed. In the drawing, for the sake of space, a suspended image display area 710 and a changing image display area 720 are mainly shown as a part of the screen.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, in a certain fluctuation display (N-th fluctuation display), on the screen, three reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol, and the fluctuations A changing image Hb0 corresponding to the display (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. In the drawing, the first reserved image is “Ha1”, the second reserved image is “Ha2”, and the third reserved image is in accordance with the entry order of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol at this time. Is represented by “Ha3”, and the changing image is represented by “Hb0”. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second hold image Ha2 is the hold image corresponding to the trigger hold at the present time. In the figure, all of the reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in a normal display mode (character icon).

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th fluctuation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha1 is digested and shifted to the fluctuation image display area 720 to be switched to the fluctuation image Hb1. The reserved images HA2 and HA3 shift to the left.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, a hold change suggestion effect (blow effect) is generated, which stimulates whether or not a hold change occurs when the hold image Ha2 (character icon) corresponding to the trigger hold is externally hit. I do.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, as a result of the character icon being destroyed by being hit from the outside, the display mode of the reserved image Ha2 is changed to the special display mode (the character C icon imitating the character “opportunity”). The next change display (the (N + 1) th change display) is started. Note that, as the above-described holding change suggestion effect, there may be a gaseous effect in which the holding change does not occur even if the character icon is hit. In addition, when providing a gaseous production, a plurality of production patterns of a batting effect that is a pending change suggestion effect that stimulates whether a pending change occurs or not may be provided, for example, a batting effect is smaller than a small batting effect pattern. It is possible to configure such that the large hitting pattern has a higher possibility that the display mode of the reserved image Ha changes, or if the display mode changes, it changes to the display mode of the reserved image Ha with a high expectation of big hit. (A large hitting pattern is more likely to change to a character C icon than a small hitting pattern).

  Next, an example of the special hold change effect in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. In the present effect example, the effect mode is the suppression chance mode, and the hold image Ha corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is displayed. In the drawing, for the sake of space, a suspended image display area 710 and a changing image display area 720 are mainly shown as a part of the screen.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain fluctuation display (N-th fluctuation display), a start-up prize generates a new operation-holding ball of a second special symbol, and this operation-holding ball (trigger-holding) ), The reserved image Ha3 corresponding to the activated reserved ball is displayed as the third reserved image corresponding to the reserved order. In the drawing, the first reserved image is “Ha1”, the second reserved image is “Ha2”, and the third reserved image is in accordance with the order of entering the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol at this time. (Hold image related to trigger hold) is represented by “Ha3”, and a fluctuating image to be subjected to fluctuating display is represented by “Hb0”. At this point, all of the reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in the normal display mode (character icons).

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th fluctuation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha1 is digested and shifted to the fluctuation image display area 720 to be switched to the fluctuation image Hb1. The suspended images Ha2 and Ha3 shift to the left, and the next variation display (the (N + 1) th variation display) is started. At the start of the variable display, a special effect effect occurs in which all the character icons are struck by lightning and become electrically charged (charged state). This special effect effect is a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold image (or the changing image) related to the trigger hold changes from the normal display mode to the special display mode. This special effect effect is continuously performed until the hold image Ha3 related to the trigger hold moves to the changing image display area 720 (until the trigger hold is exhausted).

  As shown in (C) in the figure, when the (N + 1) -th fluctuation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha2 is digested and shifted to the variable image display area 720 to be switched to the variable image Hb2. After the image Ha3 is shifted to the left, the (N + 2) th variation display is started. At this time, when the reserved image Ha2 is switched to the changing image Hb2, the display mode of the changing image Hb2 changes to the specific display mode 2 (special normal display mode). The specific display mode 2 is a display mode in which two character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, apparently, the character icon corresponding to the previous fluctuation display remains without disappearing from the moving image display area 720, and the character icon corresponding to the previous fluctuation display and the character icon corresponding to the current fluctuation display are displayed. The icon appears to be displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, when the (N + 2) -th fluctuation display is finished, the earliest reserved image Ha3 is digested to shift to the fluctuation image display area 720 and switch to the fluctuation image Hb3. At this time, when the reserved image Ha3 is switched to the changing image Hb3, the display mode of the changing image Hb3 changes to the specific display mode 3 (special normal display mode). The specific display mode 3 is a display mode in which three character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, apparently, the character icons corresponding to the two-time previous display and the previous variable display remain without disappearing, and the character icon corresponding to the last variable display, the character icon corresponding to the previous variable display, and the current It looks as if the character icon corresponding to the display is displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, immediately after the fluctuating image Hb3 is displayed in the fluctuating image display area 720, a plurality of character icons disappear and the display mode of the fluctuating image Hb3 is changed to the special display mode 3 (character (C icon), and the N + 3th variation display is started.

  In the suppression chance mode, when a trigger hold (big hit hold) that becomes a big hit occurs and the type of the big hit is “2R normal big hit”, even if the hold change look-ahead lottery is won, the hold image is held. The display mode of the image Ha or the fluctuating image Hb may be configured not to change to the display mode (character C icon) with a high degree of expectation. It is desirable to adopt a configuration that does not change to the degree display mode). The reason for this is that despite the fact that the display mode of the pending image Ha or the changing image Hb has changed to a display mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the character C icon), the battle display has been defeated in the variable display “2R The reason for the "normal jackpot" is that the player's willingness to play is reduced and the player's distrust of the change-on-hold effect is increased. Conversely, in the suppression chance mode, when a big hit is held, only when the type of the big hit is “16R specific big hit”, the holding change look-ahead lottery is won, so that the holding image Ha or the fluctuation is displayed. It is preferable that the display mode of the middle image Hb can be changed to a display mode (character C icon) with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, in this suppression chance mode, when the display mode of the fluctuating image Hb changes to the display mode of high expectation (the character C icon) at the start of the variable display (at least before reach is established), the SP reach (battle) At the point when it has been developed to “Direction”, it is determined that it has been won in “16 specific jackpots”. Here, in the normal mode as well as in the suppression chance mode, in the case of “4R probability change big hit”, the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB is changed to the display mode of high expectation (gold icon, rainbow icon). On the other hand, in the case of “4R normal big hit”, the display mode of the pending image HA or the changing image HB may not be changed to the display mode of high expectation (gold icon, rainbow icon).

<Modification 1 of pending change effect: fire pillar icon>
Next, a description will be given of a first modification of the hold change effect of the present embodiment. Modification 1 basically has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described.

  In this modification, a special display mode is set as the display mode of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode, in addition to the above-described normal display mode and special display mode. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of a suspended image and a changing image according to the first modification.

The normal display mode and the special display mode in the present modification are the same as the above-described normal display mode and the special display mode in the present embodiment. That is, the normal display mode is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is white. The special display mode 1 is a circular mode in which the image shape is a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a round icon in which the shape of the image is a round shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the image is a circular icon simulating a circular shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow.

  The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a fire pillar weak icon simulating a fire pillar. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which a fire pillar icon simulating a fire pillar having a medium image shape is used. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a fire column strong icon imitating a fire column. In this modified example, the “fire column weak icon”, “fire column inside icon”, and “fire column strong icon” are collectively referred to simply as “fire column icon”.

  In the present modified example, a case where a special display mode appears as an initial display mode of the reserved image HA (a display mode at the time when the reserved image is generated) and a case where a special display mode appears as a display mode after the reserved image HA is changed. is there. When the suspended image HA is displayed in the special display mode, the display mode is as if the fire pole icon is concealing a round icon, and the display mode of the fire pole icon is displayed until the start of the variable display or the time when the reach is established. Is continuously displayed as a special display mode. This special display mode is different from the normal display mode and the special display mode, and is not displayed until the end of the variable display (it does not become the final display mode). It can be said that the display mode is an intermediate display mode that changes to another display mode (special display mode) at some time. As a modified example, a reserved image (fire column image) different from the reserved image HA is prepared, and the column image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the reserved image HA. HA) may be displayed as a composite pending image. In this case, the fire pillar image (fire pillar icon) does not have to hide the reserved image HA (circular icon) to such an extent that it cannot be completely visually recognized. Only the part may be concealed to the extent that it can be viewed (it is preferable that at least the display color of the round icon is obscured to the extent that it cannot be identified).

  In this modification, when the display mode of the changing image HB changes from the special display mode to another display mode (when the fire pillar icon disappears) at the start of the changing display or at the time of reaching the reach, the changing image is displayed. A hold change stimulating effect is performed to determine whether the HB display mode changes to the special display mode. More specifically, the pending change-fighting effect is that after the flame of the fire pillar icon becomes stronger for a moment and disappears, it changes to a white icon (normal display mode) or changes to a blue or more icon (special display mode). It is a production that inspires. The types of the pending change-inducing effects include a failure effect in which a fire pillar icon (special display mode) changes to a white icon (normal display mode), and a fire pillar icon (special display mode) in blue or more (special display mode). There is a changing success direction. In this modified example, as a plurality of types of special display modes, “special display mode 1 (fire pillar small / low icon)” <“special display mode 2 (fire column icon)” <“special display mode 3 (fire column strong icon)” The possibility that the display mode of the changing image HB is changed to the special display mode of high expectation increases one by one in order.

Next, the relationship between the decorative symbol on the screen and the suspended image HA (image during change HB) will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing a layer structure of effect display device 70 in the present modification. (A) in the figure shows the layer structure during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and (B) in the figure shows the layer structure during the stop display of the decorative symbol. “Layer” means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the entire image. In this modified example, the background image layer R101, the decorative symbol layers R102 to R104, the suspended image HA (including the changing image HB) layer R105, and the like are displayed on the screen in a superimposed state. Each layer is arranged in a higher layer (a front side as viewed from the player) as the display priority is higher, and is arranged as a lower layer (a rear side as viewed from the player) as the display priority is lower. Is done. The decorative symbol layers R102 to R104 include a left symbol layer R102, a right symbol layer R103, and a middle symbol layer R104, but these may be collectively the same layer. In the present modification, the layer of the suspended image HA and the layer of the moving image HB are configured by the common layer R105. Alternatively, the four reserved images HA may be composed of different layers.

  Here, the special display mode (fire column icon) is formed to have a relatively large display size as compared with the other display modes (circular icon), and is arranged before and after the decorative pattern during the variable display or the stop display. It can be superimposed. In other words, there is a case where the fire pillar icon and the decorative symbol are displayed on the screen in a state in which the decorative symbol fluctuates or is stopped and displayed while the decorative symbol is being displayed while being changed. Note that the term "stop display of the decorative symbol" used herein includes the concept of "decision stop display is in progress" but does not include "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol (that is, during temporary stop display during pseudo continuous production). Is a concept included in “during variable display”). In the present embodiment, the display priority of the decorative symbol layers R102 to R104 and the reserved image HA layer R105 is switched depending on whether the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable or stopped state. Specifically, in response to receiving the change start command from the main control board 100, during the change display of the decorative symbol, the suspended image HA and the changing image HB are displayed with higher priority than the decorative symbol. The layer R105 of the reserved image HA is assigned higher than the decorative symbol layers R102 to R104. The reason is that the decorative symbol combination is clearly notified to the player to notify the player of a definite decision on the success or failure of the decorative symbol. In the situation of "middle and temporary stop display", the player is informed that the decorative pattern identification display (numerical) is being displayed even if it is not clearly visible and that the temporary stop display is being performed (such as fluctuation). It is only necessary to be able to give notification to prevent the hiding image HA (fire column holding) from being hidden by scrolling up and down of the decorative design. On the other hand, upon receiving the fluctuation stop command from the main control board 100, during the display of the fixed stop of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed preferentially over the suspended image HA and the moving image HB. The decorative design layers R102 to R104 are assigned higher than the HA layer R105. The reason for this is to clearly notify the player of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol as described above (visual recognition of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol by the reserved image HA or the like). This is to prevent the property from being lowered). Note that the background image layer R101 is always arranged lower than the decorative symbol layers R102 to R104 and the reserved image HA layer R105. As a further modified example of the first modified example, even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is preferentially displayed over the suspended image HA and the changing image HB, as during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol. In order to do so, the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104 may be assigned higher than the layer R105 of the reserved image HA. In the first modified example, the above-mentioned specification for switching the display priority including the further modified example for the special display mode (fire column icon) is adopted. However, for other display modes (circular icon), If the display is superimposed on the decorative pattern during the stop display, the above-described specification for switching the display priority including a further modified example similar to the special display mode (fire column icon) may be adopted. In addition, in the normal mode, the above-described specification for switching the display priority including a further modified example is applied, while in the other mode (for example, the suppression chance mode), the superimposed display is not performed. Therefore, the above-described specification for switching the display priority including the further modified example is not adopted, or the decorative pattern is displayed preferentially even when the superimposed display is performed, or the reserved image and the image during change are displayed preferentially. It may be configured not to adopt the above-described specification of switching the display priority including the modified example.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect example of the pending change effect in the first modification. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect of a pending change effect in the first modification.

As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain fluctuation display (the N-th fluctuation display), a start-up prize generates a new operation-holding ball of the first special symbol, and this operation-holding ball (trigger-holding) ) Is selected, the second hold image HA2 corresponding to the hold order is displayed. In the drawing, the first reserved image is “HA1” and the second reserved image (triggered reserved image) is “HA2” in accordance with the order of entry of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol at this time. , And the changing image to be subjected to the variable display is represented by “HB0”. The suspended images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are all displayed in the normal display mode (white icon).

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when the N-th fluctuation display is completed, the earliest reserved image HA1 is digested and shifted to the variable display area 720 to be switched to the variable image HB1. The image HA2 shifts to the left, and the next variation display (the (N + 1) th variation display) is started. At this time, is the display mode of the hold image HA2 related to the trigger hold changed from the normal display mode (white icon) to the special display mode 2 (fire column icon), and whether the white icon is hidden by the fire column icon on the screen? (Displayed as if how the display color of the circular icon changes thereafter is concealed). During the change display of the decorative symbol (including at the start of the change), the reserved image HA2 and the variable image HB1 are displayed with priority over the decorative symbol, and the display mode of the reserved image HA2 and the variable image HB1 and the display state of the variable image are changed. The player can clearly see the state of the change.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the N + 2nd variation display ends, and the decorative symbol is fixed and displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is preferentially displayed over the suspended image HA2 and the changing image HB1 so that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol can be clearly recognized.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the earliest hold image (hold image related to trigger hold) HA2 is digested, so that the image is shifted to the changing image display area 720 and switched to the changing image HB2.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, when the fluctuating image HB2 (the icon in the fire column) related to the trigger suspension reaches the fluctuating image display area 720, the flame of the icon in the fire column becomes momentarily intensified as a holding change fanning effect.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, immediately after the holding change swaying effect is performed (immediately after the flame of the icon in the fire column becomes strong), the display mode of the fluctuating image HB2 is changed from the special display mode 2 (icon in the fire column). The display is changed to the special display mode 3 (gold icon), and the variable display (N + 2nd variable display) is started. At this time, on the screen, the flame of the fire pillar icon disappears and disappears, so that it appears as if the golden icon hidden behind it suddenly appears. That is, while the icon in the pillar of fire is displayed, it is possible to make it look as if the white icon hidden behind the icon in the pillar of fire has already changed to a red icon. Thus, in practice, the display mode of the hold image HA2 is changed from the white icon to the fire column icon, and the display mode of the changing image HB2 is changed from the fire column icon to the red icon, Can be shown as a pseudo pending change effect as if the round icon changed from a white icon to a red icon, and it is possible to create a novel innovative pending change effect.

<Modification 2 of the pending change effect: motion display>
Next, a description will be given of a second modification of the hold change effect of the present embodiment. Modification 2 basically has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described.

In the present modified example, a plurality of types of normal display modes according to the staying stage are provided as the normal display modes of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of a suspended image HA and a changing image HB according to the second modification.

  In the present modification, a plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3 corresponding to stay stages in the normal mode are set as the display modes of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB. That is, when the effect mode during the current stay is the normal mode, the normal display mode (default display) of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB is different depending on the staying stage. In this modification, a plurality of types of normal stages (first stage, second stage, and third stage) having different types of effects are set as stay stages in the normal mode. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when a stage transition lottery performed every predetermined number of variable display times is won), the stay stage in the normal mode is switched. The background images in the normal stage are different from each other depending on the type of the stage to which the transition is made. For example, when staying in the first stage (for example, the morning stage), the “morning background image” and the second stage When the user is staying at (eg, a daytime stage), a “daytime background image” is displayed. When the user is staying at a third stage (eg, at nighttime stage), a “nighttime background image” is displayed. Here, the selection candidates of the notice effect and the SP reach effect differ according to each stage. For example, in the first stage, the notice effect for the ally character a and the notice effect for the ally character b are selected as the notice effects. As candidates for SP reach production, SP reach A-1, B-1, and C-1 in which the enemy character "a" appears are selection candidates. The announcement effect on the ally character c is a selection candidate, and the SP reach A-2, B-2, and C-2 in which the enemy character b appears are the selection candidates as the SP reach effect, and the ally character a is the third stage announcement effect. And the advance notice effect on the ally character d are selection candidates, and the SP reach effect SP Reach A-3, B-3, C-3 which Rakuta c appears becomes a selection candidate.

  Here, among the plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3, the normal display mode 1 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage, the normal display mode 2 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage, and the normal display mode. 3 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The normal display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a circular icon imitating a round shape. The normal display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a flag icon imitating a flag. The normal display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a heart icon imitating a heart.

  The special display modes 1 to 5 are display modes common to all stages irrespective of the stage currently staying. Here, the special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is iridescent. As a further modified example, the blue icon / green icon having a relatively low jackpot expectation have a display mode corresponding to each stage (specifically, the display colors of the image shapes of the normal display modes 1 to 3 are changed). The red icon, the gold icon, and the rainbow icon, which have relatively low jackpot expectation, may have special display modes 3 to 5 common to all stages.

In the present modification, when the display mode of the suspended image HA or the changing image HB is the normal display mode, a motion effect of performing an operation display (also referred to as “motion display”) of the suspended image HA or the changing image HB is executed. Is done. The image control board 300 stores moving image data for operationally displaying the suspended image HA and the changing image HB. The reproduction time of this moving image data is 2 seconds, and is video data in which continuous operations are recorded from the first image to the last image. Then, by repeatedly reproducing (loop reproduction) the moving image data for two seconds, a motion effect in which the reserved image or the changing image repeats a predetermined operation display (motion display) is performed. In this modification, the movement of the reserved image HA between the respective image display areas as the reserved image is consumed is referred to as “shift”, and the reserved image HA itself or the moving image HB itself operates within the respective image display areas. Doing is called "motion". However, the reserved image HA or the moving image HB may operate beyond the respective image display areas, and at least a part of the neighboring reserved images HA or between the reserved image HA and the varying image HB May operate in a display mode superimposed on the front and back.

  FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram for explaining a motion effect of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB in the second modification. In the motion effect, a period from when each icon starts a predetermined operation to its end (until a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the predetermined operation is completed) is defined as one cycle, and the motion display of such a cycle is repeatedly performed. It is a production. In the present modification, motion patterns having different operation modes are set according to the types of the normal display modes 1 to 3. In the circle icon (normal display mode 1), a series of motion patterns in which the circle icon expands and contracts vertically is set. In the flag icon (normal display mode 2), a series of motion patterns in which the bunting portion of the flag icon sways in the wind is set. In the heart icon (normal display mode 3), a series of motion patterns in which the heart icon rotates around the central axis are set. In this modification, “2 seconds” is set as the motion display cycle (ie, the playback time of the moving image data) in any of the icons (normal display modes 1 to 3), and the “2 seconds” is set as one cycle. Is repeatedly executed. Here, in the special display modes 1 to 5 as well, a predetermined motion display may be repeatedly executed with “2 seconds” as one cycle, or the display modes may be further differentiated from the normal display modes 1 to 3. For this purpose, a predetermined motion display may be repeatedly executed with “1 second” as one cycle. As another modified example, the special display modes 1 to 5 may be configured so that motion display is not performed. As a further modified example, the cycle of the operation display of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB may substantially coincide with the cycle of the change display of the decorative symbol (the cycle of one scroll display). Further, in the present embodiment, the period (2 seconds) of the operation display of the hold image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode is set to the shortest of the fluctuation display time in the normal mode (basic fluctuation time 3 seconds + variation addition time 0 second) = 3 seconds) and the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are displayed for at least one cycle of operation regardless of which of the main fluctuation pattern and the main fluctuation addition pattern is selected. However, the period of the operation display of the normal mode suspended image HA and the changing image HB may be substantially equal to the minimum time of the normal mode fluctuation display time, or the normal mode suspended image HA and the fluctuation image HB may be changed. The cycle of the operation display of the middle image HB may be set to be longer than the shortest change display time of the normal mode.

In each of the normal display modes 1 to 3, a reference operation posture (a leading image of moving image data) serving as a starting point of each motion display is set. When the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the motion display is started from the reference operation posture, and the motion display is restarted from the reference operation posture every time a predetermined cycle (2 seconds) is reached (loop playback is performed). ). On the other hand, when the change display of the decorative symbol ends, the motion display of the suspended image HA and the changing image HB is forcibly ended. Then, when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the suspended image HA and the changing image HB are switched to the reference operation posture, and the motion display is started from the reference operation posture (loop playback is performed). ). When the new reserved image HA is displayed, the motion display is started with the reference operation posture as a starting point regardless of the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the moving image HB. That is, the motion display of the new hold image HA and the motion display of the existing hold image HA and the changing image HB are mutually exclusive unless the existing hold image HA and the changing image HB have the reference operation posture. Synchronization does not occur, and the operating posture of each other is shifted. However, the motion display of the new hold image HA and the motion display of the existing hold image HA and the changing image HB are synchronized with each other when the next change display is started. In the present modification, “synchronization” of the motion display means that the timing of the reference operation posture in the motion display of each of the pending image HA and the moving image HB is the same. In other words, on the premise that the operation cycle of each suspended image HA and the moving image HB is the same, each suspended image HA and the moving image HB can take the same operation posture at any timing during the motion display. is there.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of a motion effect of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a motion effect in the second modification. In the present effect example, the effect stage is the third stage, and the holding image HA corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and the changing image HB corresponding to the changing display of the first special symbol are displayed. You.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, when the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (the Nth variation display) is started, the suspended images HA1 and HA2 and the image during variation HB0 are motion-displayed starting from the reference operation posture. To start. In the drawing, the first reserved image is represented by "HA1" and the second reserved image is represented by "HA2" in accordance with the order of entry of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol at this time. The changing image to be displayed is represented by “HB0”.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, a motion display is performed in which the pending images HA1, HB2 and the fluctuating image HB0 rotate around their own central axes. At this time, the motion displays of the pending images HA1 and HA2 and the moving image HB0 are synchronized with each other (in the same operation mode). (B) in the figure shows a state where the suspended images HA1 and HB1 and the changing image HB0 are rotated by 90 degrees from the reference operation posture.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the generation of a new first special symbol operation holding ball causes the third holding image (new holding image) HA3 corresponding to the holding order to be in the reference operation posture. Appear. At this time, the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the moving image HB0 are displaced to the operating posture rotated about 180 degrees with respect to the reference operating posture. Therefore, the motion display of the new reserved image HA3 is started in an asynchronous state (state in which the operation posture is shifted) with respect to the motion display of the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the new reserved image HA3 rotates around its own central axis while taking an operation posture shifted from the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the moving image HB0 by about 180 degrees. Perform motion display.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the motion display of the pending images HA1 to HA3 and the changing image HB0 is forcibly stopped when the change display of the decorative symbol ends this time. In FIG. 7E, the suspended images HA1 and HA2 and the moving image HB0 are forcibly stopped at an operation posture rotated about 90 degrees from the reference operation posture, and the reserved image HA3 is rotated about 270 degrees from the reference operation posture. This shows a state where the forcible stop is performed in the operating posture.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, with the completion of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first reserved image HA1 is shifted to the variable image display area 720 while maintaining the forced stop posture, and the variable image HB1 is changed. And the subsequent reserved images HA2 and HA3 shift to the left while maintaining the forced stop posture.

As shown in (G) in the figure, when the next variation display of the decorative symbol (the (N + 1) th variation display) is started, the held images HA2, HB3 and the image during variation HB1 are switched to the reference operation posture, Motion display is started with the reference operation posture as a starting point. In other words, when the change display is started, the motion display of the hold image HA3 and the motion display of the hold image HA2 and the moving image HB1 are synchronized with each other.

  As shown in (H) in the figure, the motion display of each of the pending images HA2, HA3 and the changing image HB1 is performed with a period of 2 seconds until the decorative display of the decorative symbol (the (N + 1) th variable display) ends. Displayed repeatedly.

  In the above-described second modification, when a new reserved image is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of the new reserved image HA is not synchronized with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. Although the configuration is performed in the form (except when the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the reference operation posture), the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a new reserved image is generated by a start winning. Is displayed, the motion display of the new reserved image HA may be performed in synchronization with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. In that case, the following two methods (1) and (2) can be cited as methods for synchronizing the motion displays. (1) By causing the new reserved image HA to appear in the same operational posture as the current operational posture of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB, and starting the motion display of the new reserved image HA, the existing reserved image HA is started. Synchronize with the motion display of the pending image HA and the moving image HB. (2) After the new reserved image HA appears in the reference operation posture, the opportunity that the operation postures of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB become the reference operation posture (that is, the existing reserved images HA and By starting the motion display of the new reserved image HA when the motion display for one cycle of the moving image HB is completed), the motion display of the new reserved image HA and the moving image HB is synchronized.

  In the above-described second modification, the motion display of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB is started with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, and the change display of the decorative symbol is ended with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. Although the motion display of the pending image HA and the moving image HB is terminated (forced stop), the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It may be configured to execute continuously irrespective of the start and end of the display. In other words, the motion display of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB is continued without ending (forcibly stopping) the change display of the decorative symbol when the display of the decorative symbol is ended, and the motion display is performed between the display changes of the decorative symbol each time. You may comprise so that it may connect continuously (seamlessly) without interruption. In this case, when a new reserved image HA is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of the new reserved image HA is started in synchronization with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the moving image HB. Preferably. At this time, the method of synchronizing the motion displays is the same as the two methods (1) and (2) described above. When the motion display of the reserved image HA and the moving image HB is continued regardless of the start and end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reserved image HA is shifted to the left due to the reserved use. It is preferable to continue the motion display of the HA. However, the motion display of the reserved image HA may be stopped only while the reserved image HA is shifted to the left due to the reserved use, and the motion display may be resumed after the reserved image HA is shifted.

Furthermore, in the second modification example described above, the motion display is performed when the suspended image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode in all the normal stages. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. When staying at a predetermined normal stage among a plurality of normal stages, even if the suspended image HA and the moving image HB are in the normal display mode, motion display of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB is not performed. May be configured. That is, a normal display mode in which no motion display is performed may be set among the plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3. In the normal display mode that does not display motion, instead of not displaying motion,
The light emission display (for example, the suspended image HA and the changing image HB blinking) may be configured to be performed at the same cycle as the operation cycle of another motion display.

  Further, in the second modification, the motion display is performed only when the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The motion display may be performed even when the changing image HB is in the special display mode (or only when the suspended image HA and the changing image HB are in the special display mode). Further, in the above-described second modification, the special display mode of the reserved image HA and the moving image HB is configured as a display mode common to each normal stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The special display mode of the middle image HB may be configured as a different display mode depending on the type of stay stage. Further, one of the pending image HA and the moving image HB may be displayed in motion, and the other of the suspended image HA and the moving image HB may not be displayed in motion. Further, when a hold occurs, a hold occurrence display may be provided which is an effect that gradually appears from a situation where no hold image exists, and the hold occurrence display is provided from the start to the end (the start of the appearance of the hold image). From the time until the entire image is displayed) is set to, for example, 0.3 second, and it is desirable to make the effect time shorter than that of the motion display. In addition, when a new hold occurrence display is performed due to a new hold occurring during a hold occurrence display related to a certain hold image, the previous hold occurrence display is not forcibly terminated, and the previous hold occurrence display and the subsequent hold occurrence display are not terminated. (New) hold occurrence display is performed in parallel. Also, when the reserved image is shifted to the left by performing the reserved digestion, an effect of moving from the current position of the reserved image (the position before the shift display) to the position after the movement (the position after the shift display) is performed. A certain shift display effect may be provided, and the shift display effect is, for example, 0.7 seconds, a short effect time compared to the motion display, and a long effect time compared to the hold occurrence display. It is desirable that This shift display effect can be performed simultaneously with the hold occurrence display when the hold occurrence timing and the hold digestion timing are substantially the same timing. Also, when the hold image is shifted (moved) in the shift display effect, the motion display of the hold image is stopped, and during the shift display from the start of the shift display, the hold image is fixedly displayed in the reference operation posture. After the shift display (after the end of the shift display effect), the motion display may be restarted from the reference operation posture.

[Battle production / meter production]
Next, “battle production” and “meter production” will be described as characteristic productions performed when the production mode is the fantasy fight rush mode.

<Battle production>
As described above, the battle effect is an effect of notifying the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination and the type of the big hit according to the result (win / loss) of the ally character fighting the enemy character. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode currently being executed is the phantom rush mode, if the variation display is developed into SP reach, a battle effect in which the ally character battles the enemy character is developed as the reach effect. Then, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning is determined at the time when the battle effect occurs (at the time when the game reaches the SP reach), and according to the result of the battle effect (win / loss), one of the “specific jackpot” and the “normal jackpot” is determined. It indicates or informs whether or not it has been won.

  First, an effect flow of a battle effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow of a battle effect in the present embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of the battle effect is shown in chronological order from left to right on the page.

First, as shown in FIG. 53, after the change display is started, a step-up effect (ST101) is performed as a notice effect before reaching is established. The step-up effect is an evolving effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise in accordance with a predetermined order, and indicates or informs of a high degree of expectation of a big hit according to the number of developing stages. . The step-up effect is a first step-up effect composed of only the first-stage effect step SU1 of the three-stage effect steps (SU1, SU2, SU3) and a second-stage effect step SU2. There is a two-step up effect and a third step-up effect that extends to the third stage effect step SU3. Subsequently, after an opponent character selection effect of selecting an opponent of the battle effect from among the plurality of enemy characters displayed on the screen (ST102), a reach effect effect for inflating whether or not reach is established (ST102). ST103) is executed. If the reach is not established after the reach-promotion effect (ST103) has been performed (ST104), it is determined that "missing" has occurred, and the variable display ends as it is (ST105). On the other hand, when the reach is established and the SP reaches the reach, it is determined that the "big hit" is established at that time, and thereafter, a battle effect in which the ally character battles the enemy character (the enemy character selected by the player) is developed. (ST106 to ST128).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect routes 1 to 5 are prepared as the effect route of the battle effect, and the winning or losing of the battle effect is derived through different effect processes for each effect route. Broadly speaking, the production route 1 is a route for a normal jackpot in which the result of the battle effect is “defeat”, and the production routes 2 to 5 are routes for a specific jackpot in which the result of the battle effect is “victory”. . In this embodiment, in any of the effect routes 1 to 5, when the effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character appears (at the time when the ally attack effect described later occurs), the battle effect result is obtained. It is a specification that will determine "winning" (winning a specific jackpot).

  At the branch point of each of the effect routes 1 to 5, a branch effect indicating which one of the plurality of effect routes 1 to 5 will proceed to is provided. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of branching effects, branching effect 1 (first-strength directing effect: ST107), branching effect 2 (enemy first-strike directing effect: ST112), branching effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance directing effect: ST119), branching effect 4 (stirring effect: ST125) is set.

  Branching effect 1 (first strike effect: ST107) shifts to “strategy route 2” where the ally character performs a first strike by initiating whether the first strike is a friendly character or an enemy character. This is an effect that indicates whether the enemy character moves to “effect routes 1, 3, 4, 5”, which is a route for performing the first strike.

  In branching effect 2 (enemy first strike directing: ST112), whether to shift to “staging route 3” where the first strike is a single route by initiating whether the first strike of the enemy character is a single blow or a continuous hit. This is an effect that suggests whether the first strike will shift to “effect routes 1, 4, and 5”, which are routes that will be repeated hits.

  The branch effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance and directing effect: ST119) determines whether or not the attack of the enemy character can be avoided, thereby shifting to or avoiding “directing route 4”, which is a route that can be successfully avoided. This is an effect suggesting whether or not to shift to “effect routes 1, 5” that is a route that fails.

  The branch effect 4 (stirring effect directing: ST125) determines whether or not to shift to “directing route 5”, which is a route that succeeds in the appearance of an accessory, by inducing whether or not an accessory appears on the front of the screen. This is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to “effect route 1” that is a route that fails to appear.

Therefore, the production route 1 goes through four branch productions, the production route 2 goes through one branch production, the production route 3 goes through two branch productions, and the production route 4 takes three branch productions. , And the effect route 5 passes through four branch effects. Therefore, all of the effect routes 1 to 5 are routes that go through at least one branch effect.

  Specifically, the production route 1 is a battle start production (ST106) → a first-running production (ST107) → an enemy-first production production (ST112) → an enemy attack continuous hit production (ST118) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST119) → an enemy attack The production progresses in the flow of the avoidance failure production (ST124) → the role of the actor's action (ST125) → the defeat production (ST128).

  The production route 2 is a battle start production (ST106) → a preemptive production (ST107) → an allied first production (ST108) → a friendly attack production (ST109) → a movable character production (ST110) → a victory production (ST111). Progress.

  The production route 3 is a battle start production (ST106) → a first-running production (ST107) → an enemy-first production production (ST112) → an enemy attack continuous hit production (ST113) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST114) → an ally attack production (ST115) → The effect progresses in the flow of the movable object effect (ST116) → the victory effect (ST117).

  The production route 4 is a battle start production (ST106) → a first-initiated production (ST107) → an enemy-first production production (ST112) → an enemy attack continuous hit production (ST118) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST119) → a successful enemy attack avoidance production ( The production progresses in the flow of ST120) → allied attack production (ST121) → movable character production production (ST122) → victory production (ST123).

  The production route 5 is a battle start production (ST106) → a first-initiative production (ST107) → an enemy-first production production (ST112) → an enemy attack continuous hit production (ST118) → an enemy attack avoidance production (ST119) → an enemy attack avoidance failure production ( The production progresses in the flow of ST124) → promotion of the production (ST125) → movable production of the production (ST126) → victory production (ST127).

  Here, the victory effect (ST111, ST117, ST123, ST127) means an effect that definitively reports that the result of the battle effect is a victory (the fact that the "special jackpot" has been won). In addition, the defeat effect (ST128) means an effect that definitely notifies that the result of the battle effect has been defeated (that the "normal jackpot" has been won).

<Meter production>
Subsequently, the meter effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a schematic diagram illustrating a basic screen of a meter effect. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is the fantasy fight rush mode, basically, the meter effect is executed in all the variable displays during staying in the fantasy fight rush mode. This meter effect is an effect of changing the level (also referred to as “meter value”) of the meter image displayed on the screen during the execution of the variable display. The meter image is displayed in the meter display area 740 on the left side of the screen, and is a vertically long image indicating levels from “1” to “10”, for example. The meter effect is performed in each variation display unit (the execution of the meter effect is started at the start of each variation display, and the execution of the meter effect ends when the variation display is stopped each time). The level of the meter image is cleared to zero (reset) at the start of each variation display or at the end of the variation display. In the present embodiment, when the level of the meter image reaches MAX (the tenth stage), it is confirmed that the battle effect result will be won. Therefore, the level of the meter image can be said to be an index indicating the degree of expectation (probability of change) in which the result of the battle effect wins.

In this embodiment, a meter counter is provided as a counting means for controlling the level (meter value) of the meter image. The count value of the meter counter is an internal numerical value (referred to as “internal numerical value”) corresponding to the level (meter value) of the meter image, and the internal numerical value is “
It can be updated in units of "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), each time the internal value of the meter counter increases by “10”, the level of the meter image is increased by “one step”. Therefore, when the internal numerical value increases to the maximum value (100), the level of the meter image reaches MAX (the tenth stage). The internal value of the meter counter is cleared to zero (reset) at the start of each variation display or at the end of the variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be increased or decreased at a plurality of timings T1 to T7 set during the fluctuation display. Of the plurality of timings T1 to T7, timing T1 is a timing before reach is established, and timings T2 to T7 are timings after reach is established (after battle development). Specifically, the timing T1 is a timing during a period during which the step-up notice effect (ST101) is being executed. The timing T2 is a timing during a period in which the battle start effect (ST106) is being executed. The timing T3 is a timing during a period during which the enemy-fighting effect (ST112) is being executed. The timing T4 is a timing during a period during which the enemy attack avoidance and stir effect (ST124) is being executed. The timings T5, T6, and T7 are timings during the period when the ally attack effect (ST109, ST115, ST121) is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the upper limit value of the internal value of the meter counter is set for each of the timings T1 to T7. That is, the upper limit value of the internal numerical value is a limit value of the internal numerical value that can be obtained before each of the timings T1 to T7 ends. Therefore, the internal numerical value of the meter counter does not increase beyond the upper limit value assigned to the currently staying timings T1 to T7, and remains within the upper limit value until each of the timings T1 to T7 ends. Only increases within are allowed. In the present embodiment, as the upper limit of the internal numerical value, “20” is set at the timing T1, “40” is set at the timing T2, “60” is set at the timing T3, and “100” is set at the timings T4, T5, T6, and T7. Basically, the upper limit becomes higher at later timings T1 to T7 in chronological order.

  Here, as described above, the maximum value (100) is set as the upper limit value of the internal numerical value in the second half of the timing T4 to T7. Regarding the timing T4, in a scene where the battle result of the battle effect greatly depends on whether or not the ally character can avoid the attack of the enemy character (or whether or not the enemy character can endure the attack) (a scene directly connected to a hit). Yes, the internal numerical value can reach the maximum value (100) on condition that the number of times the effect button 15 is operated by the player reaches the specified number. Further, at timings T5 to T7, since the timing at which the ally character attacks (the result of the battle effect is determined to be victory), the internal numerical value is forcibly set to the maximum value (at substantially the same time as the ally character's attack). 100). Therefore, in the timings T5 to T7, the effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character and the effect in which the meter image reaches the MAX level definitely determine that the result of the battle effect is a victory. (Specified jackpot confirmation effect). Note that, as the execution timing of the confirmed effect, the timing at which the ally character attacks and the timing at which the meter image reaches the MAX level may be different, and the meter image reaches the MAX level after the ally character attack occurs. May be configured so that the attack of the ally character occurs after the meter image reaches the MAX level.

Further, among the plurality of timings T1 to T7, in the enemy-first control effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance control effect (ST124) performed at timings T3 and T4, a predetermined effect is advanced by the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. Button effect (operation request effect). During the execution of the enemy-first control effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance control effect (ST124), an operation effective period (hereinafter, referred to as a "first operation effective period") in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid is set. Have been. During the first operation validity period, for example, a notification effect for prompting the operation input of the effect button 15 on the screen or the like or for prompting the operation input is performed. Then, during the execution of the enemy-first control effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance effect (ST124), a numerical value corresponding to the number of times the effect button 15 is operated is added to the internal numerical value. On the other hand, at other timings T1 to T2 and T5 to T7, the effect (battle start effect, ally attack effect) is a non-button effect (non-operation request) in which the effect is advanced without the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. Direction). Therefore, during the execution of the non-button effect, a predetermined value (such as a fixed value or a lottery value) is automatically added to the internal numerical value even if the player does not operate the effect button 15.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, during the period in which the meter effect is being executed, the operation input of the effect button 15 becomes possible in all periods except the above-mentioned first operation valid period. A validity period (hereinafter, referred to as a “second operation validity period” to be conceptually distinguished from the first operation validity period) is set. Only the partial period may be used (for example, only the timing of T2 and T5). The second operation validity period is different from the above-described first operation validity period, and is a period in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid without explicitly prompting the player to input the operation of the effect button 15. That is, during the second operation valid period, the notification effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 15 or for prompting the operation input is not performed. Thus, during the execution period of the meter effect, even if the effect button 15 is operated during the first operation valid period, or if the effect button 15 is operated during the second operation valid period, the effect button It becomes possible to increase the internal numerical value by the operation of No. 15 (the level of the meter image can be raised). Hereinafter, in order to clearly distinguish the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the first operation valid period from the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation valid period, the effect performed during the first operation valid period The operation of the button 15 is also referred to as “front button operation”, and the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation effective period is also referred to as “back button operation”. Here, as a modified example, an effect of increasing the level of the meter effect (an effect of changing the display mode of the meter effect) occurs by operating the effect button 15 in the first operation effective period, but in the second operation effective period. Even if the operation of the effect button 15 is operated, an effect that increases the level of the meter effect is not generated. For example, an effect simulating a flame around the screen, which is another effect, is generated, and the intensity of the flame is gradually reduced. An effect to be changed may be generated. The intensity of the flame is 20 levels, and it is configured to indicate the possibility of transition to a certain degree of expectation degree (if a meter effect is used even in the normal mode, a big hit expectation degree) or a branch with a high degree of expectation. Is also good. That is, in the present modified example, an effect (front button effect) generated based on the front button operation during the first operation valid period, and an effect (back button effect) generated based on the back button operation during the second operation valid period. However, it is comprised as a mutually different production. Also, using the same meter image, the meter display added and displayed by the front button operation and the meter display added and displayed by the back button operation may be set to different display modes (for example, the additional display is performed by the front button operation). The meter display is blue, and the meter display added by operating the back button is red).

  In the present embodiment, at the end of each of the timings T1 to T7, if the internal numerical value of the meter counter does not reach the predetermined upper limit value assigned to each of the timings T1 to T7, the upper limit value is set by operating the back button by the player. Complementation of internal numerical values up to is possible. That is, when the internal numerical value does not reach the upper limit value assigned to the certain timing at the end of a certain timing among the plurality of timings T1 to T9, the next timing is limited to this upper limit value. Until the arrival, the internal numerical value can be complementarily increased by operating the back button. For example, “60” is assigned as the upper limit to the timing T3, but if the internal numerical value has not reached the upper limit (60) before the end of the timing T3, the next timing By the time the player performs the back button operation before reaching T4, the internal numerical value can be increased up to the upper limit value (60).

  As a modified example, when the internal numerical value that can be increased by the back button operation is set to unlimited (however, the maximum value is set to “100” as a limit), and when the back button operation is performed exceptionally, The configuration may be such that the internal numerical value can be increased beyond the prescribed upper limit value set at the timings T1 to T9. In other words, even before the timing when the upper limit of the internal numerical value is set to the maximum value (100) (timing T6 to T9), the player can freely operate the back button at a desired timing, The level of the meter image is allowed to reach the MAX level (10 levels) early, so that the result of the battle effect can be quickly known. As a result, the player's willingness for button operation can be further increased, and a strong effect can be given to the player by a synergistic effect of the battle effect and the meter effect.

  Further, as a modified example, the meter image may be switched between the normal display and the enlarged display in the variable display during the fantasy battle rush mode. At the start of the variable display, the meter image is normally displayed, before the battle of the variable display is developed, the meter image is enlarged and displayed only at the timings T1 to T3. It is preferable that the meter image is enlarged and displayed (for the entire period after the SP reach including T9).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the effect mode in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, the effect mode is not limited to the illusion rush mode (probable changing game state), but may be the effect mode. Even in the suppression chance mode (probably changing game state, time saving game state) or the revenge mode (time saving game state), the meter effect can be executed. Here, basically, the meter effect in the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode and the meter effect in the fantasy fight rush mode have the same configuration. However, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the meter effect is executed (a meter image is displayed) triggered by the fact that the variable display has developed into SP reach (battle effect). That is, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the variable display is a variable display that triggers the execution of the battle effect (that is, a variable display in which the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit). Is the execution condition of the meter effect. Then, when the variable display has developed into SP reach, the battle effect and the meter effect are started substantially simultaneously. Therefore, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be updated at timings T2 to T7 set after the start of the battle effect among the timings T1 to T7. Also, after the start of the battle effect, the internal numerical value of the meter count can be updated by operating the back button in the same manner as described above. On the other hand, before developing into a battle effect, the back button operation is treated as invalid (the second operation validity period is not set before developing into the battle effect).

  Further, as a modified example, SP reach D may be generated even in the normal mode, and the same battle effect and meter effect may be executed. In that case, the pseudo continuous production and the special production in the present embodiment and each modified example are executed, and the holding image and the changing image are displayed including the holding change production, and then the SP reach D is developed. You may comprise. In such a configuration, winning the battle effect in the normal mode does not require the probability change jackpot to be determined, but merely indicates that the jackpot is determined. In addition, the level of the meter effect may be an index of the jackpot expectation instead of the index of the probability change expectation.

[Director control effect]
Next, a base suppression effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram illustrating an effect flow in the suppression chance mode, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram illustrating a basic screen of the base suppression effect. In the base suppression effect, when the effect mode currently being executed is the suppression chance mode, the suppression chance mode (high base state) depends on whether or not a predetermined display value reaches a target value.
Is a production suggesting the possibility of continuing.

  The execution period of the suppression chance mode is divided into a plurality of effect sections according to the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed. Specifically, the first production section is set from the first rotation to the 20th rotation, and the second production section is set from the 21st rotation to the 40th rotation, starting immediately after entering the suppression chance mode. , A third effect section is set from the 41st to the 60th rotation, and a fourth effect section is set from the 61st rotation (from the 61st rotation to the next big hit). In the present embodiment, the number of stays in each production section (excluding the fourth production section) is set to “20 times” as the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated, but each production section (excluding the fourth production section). May be set to different numbers.

  Here, the first effect section is an effect section in which an image in which the ally character stays at the first base is displayed (an effect section in which the first base is a background image). The second effect section is an effect section in which an image in which an ally character stays at the second base is displayed (an effect section in which the second base is a background image). The third effect section is an effect section in which an image in which an ally character stays at the third base is displayed (an effect section in which the third base is a background image). The fourth effect section is an effect section in which an image in which an ally character stays at the fourth base is displayed (an effect section in which the fourth base is a background image).

  In the variation display of the last round (20th rotation, 40th rotation, 60th rotation) of each production section, a base branch indicating whether or not to shift to the next production section (whether or not the suppression chance mode is continued). An effect is performed. In the present embodiment, when the last variation display of each effect section is a “variable” change display, a branch branch effect is executed. In the case where the last variation display of each effect section is a "variable hit" change display, a transition is made from the currently staying base to the central base and a battle effect is performed (details will be described later). Hereinafter, for convenience, the base branch production in the first production section is referred to as “first base branch production”, the base branch production in the second production section is referred to as “second base branch production”, and the base branch production in the third production section is referred to as “first branch production”. It is also referred to as "three-site branch production". Each base branch production is a production that stimulates whether or not a friend character can break through the last door installed at the base where the user is currently staying. When the ally character can break through the final door, it is successfully transferred to the next base (the next production section), and it is suggested that the suppression chance mode (high base state) is continued. On the other hand, if the ally character cannot break through the final door, it is suggested that the transition to the next base (next production section) fails and the suppression chance mode (high base state) ends.

  In the fluctuation display except for the last round (20th rotation, 40th rotation, 60th rotation) of each effect section, a base suppression effect of adding or subtracting a predetermined numerical value is executed. That is, this base suppression effect is performed in the fluctuation display of the 1st to 19th turns of the first effect section, the 21st to 39th turns of the second effect section, and the 41st to 59th turns of the third effect section. Hereinafter, for convenience, the base suppression effect in the first production section is “first base suppression effect”, the base suppression effect in the second production section is “second base suppression effect”, and the base suppression effect in the third production segment is “ The three-site suppression effect ”and the base-suppression effect in the fourth effect section are also referred to as“ fourth-point suppression effect ”.

The base suppression effect is an effect in which the remaining number (predetermined numerical value) of small fish characters (enemy characters whose relative order is lower) hiding at the base where the vehicle is currently staying is subtracted toward the target value. In the present embodiment, “0” is set as the target value of the remaining number of small fish characters. During the execution of the base suppression effect, as shown in FIG. 57, the remaining number of small fish characters ("500" in the illustrated example) is always displayed in the remaining number display area 751 on the screen. The remaining number of small fish characters is reduced at once at the end of each variation display. However, when staying in the fourth production section (fourth base), the remaining number of enemy characters is always fixed at “0” (the remaining number is not added or subtracted). In the remaining number display area 752 on the screen, the remaining number of times in the suppression chance mode (“15 times” in the illustrated example) is displayed. However, this remaining number is displayed as a countdown with the initial value being “20 times” at the start of each production section, and is the true remaining number (when the suppression chance mode ends after 20 rotations), and There is a case where the number of false remaining times is reached (a case where the suppression chance mode is continued after 20 rotations). Then, when the remaining number of times reaches “0” (that is, when the last time of each effect section is reached), a base branch effect indicating whether or not it is possible to move to the next base is performed. The layout of each base, the position of the base currently staying, and the like are displayed in the map display area 753 on the screen. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of maps are prepared, and the type of the map is determined by an effect lottery performed when entering the suppression chance mode. Depending on the type of the map, the difficulty level of each base (that is, the number of times the suppression mode is continued) is suggested.

  In the present embodiment, when the remaining number of small fish characters reaches the target value in each production section, it means that the currently staying base has been suppressed (the transition to the next base is definitive). That is, when the remaining number of small fish characters reaches the target value, it is determined that the base branch effect is a successful effect in the last variation display in the current effect section (the continuation of the suppression chance mode is determined). Therefore, as the remaining number of small fish characters is closer to the target value, the degree of expectation of success in the branch branch effect performed in the last round of each base increases.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram for explaining a base suppression effect table (progress pattern). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of base suppression effects tables 0 to 19 are set, and one of the base suppression effects tables is set in accordance with the type (symbol group) of the jackpot that triggered the shift to the suppression chance mode. Is selected by lottery.

  In the column of “base suppression effect table” in the figure, the number of the base suppression effect table is shown. In the present embodiment, an “initial value”, a “progress pattern”, an “accumulated upper limit”, and the like, which will be described later, are defined for each type (number) of the base suppression effect table. "Initial value" in the figure means the initial value of the remaining number of enemy characters (the initial value displayed at the start of the production section). Any one of “999”, “500”, “100”, and “0” is set as the initial value. The smaller the initial value, the more the remaining number of enemy characters reaches the target value. Expectation increases.

  In the column of “progress pattern” in the figure, the first production section (1st to 19th rotation), the second production section (21st to 39th rotation), and the third production section (41st to 59th rotation) are shown. In each variation display, the upper limit of the number of people (subtractable people) that can be subtracted from the remaining number of small fish characters is shown. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit (maximum value) of the number of decrements of the small fish character is determined for each single fluctuation display (the subtraction cannot exceed the upper limit). One of “110”, “50”, “15”, and “0” is set as the upper limit of the number of subtracted persons. In this embodiment, although not shown, a lower limit of the number of subtracted persons is set in addition to the upper limit of the number of subtracted persons. Specifically, a lower limit “100” corresponding to the upper limit “110”, a lower limit “45” corresponding to the upper limit “50”, and a lower limit “10” corresponding to the upper limit “15” are respectively set. ing. Therefore, the range (subtraction allowable range) in which the enemy character can be subtracted during each variation display is defined by the combination of the upper limit value and the lower limit value. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of enemy characters can be subtracted within any of the allowable subtraction ranges of “100 to 110”, “45 to 50”, and “10 to 15”. In the present embodiment, the number of enemy characters to be subtracted is determined by lot within the above-described subtraction range. For example, when the subtraction allowable range is set to “10 to 15”, the number of subtractions is “10”, “11”, “12”, “13”, “14”, or “15”. Either is determined by lottery, and at the end of the variable display, the subtracted number is subtracted from the remaining number of enemy characters.

In addition, the “cumulative upper limit value” in the figure means a total value obtained by adding the upper limit value of the number of subtracted persons assigned to each variation display (19 variations display). For example, in the base suppression effect table 0, since the upper limit of the number of subtracted persons is set to “50” in all the variable displays, the cumulative upper limit is “950 (50 × 19 = 950)”. Here, when the base suppression effect tables 5 to 9, 13 to 14, and 17 to 19 in which the cumulative upper limit is set to be equal to or more than the initial value are selected, the remaining enemy characters are selected according to the lottery value of the subtracted number. Indicates that the number of people may reach the target value. On the other hand, when the base suppression effect tables 0 to 4, 10 to 12, and 15 to 16 in which the cumulative upper limit value is set to be less than the initial value are selected, the remaining enemy characters remain irrespective of the lottery value of the subtracted number. Indicates that the number of people is unlikely to reach the target value. In the present embodiment, when the suppression chance mode is scheduled to end in the production section currently staying, the remaining number of enemy characters reaches the target value during execution of the base suppression production (that is, the suppression). In order to prevent the false production result of "Chance mode continuation", the base suppression production pattern according to the number of continuations of the current suppression chance mode (big hit type that triggered the transition to the current suppression chance mode) Are categorized.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram illustrating a lottery table of the base elimination effect. In the drawing, for each effect section, for each big hit type (each symbol group A to D, F to H), “○” is selected in the base suppression production table as a selection candidate, and base suppression as a non-selection candidate. The effect table is marked with “x”. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the lottery table is configured as a common table in all effect sections (excluding the fourth effect section). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different lottery table may be used for each effect section. May be prepared.

  When staying in the first production section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups A and F) for which the number of times of fluctuation time reduction (the number of times of electric support) is set to “20”, the base suppression where the cumulative upper limit value is less than the initial value. Although only the effect table is a candidate for selection, the jackpot types (symbol groups B, C, D, G, and C) whose fluctuation time reduction times (electric support times) are set to “40”, “60”, and “10000” are set. Regarding I), all base suppression effect patterns are selection candidates.

  In the case of staying in the second effect section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups B and G) for which the number of times of fluctuation time reduction (number of times of electric support) is set to "40", the base suppression effect in which the cumulative upper limit number is less than the initial value. Only the table is a candidate for selection, but for the jackpot types (symbol groups C, D, I) for which the variation time reduction times (electric support times) are set to "60 times" and "10000 times", all base suppression effects The table is a selection candidate.

  When staying in the third production section, for the jackpot types (symbol groups C and I) for which the number of times of fluctuation time reduction (number of times of electric support) is set to “60”, the base suppression where the cumulative upper limit number is less than the initial value. Only the effect table is a selection candidate, but for the jackpot type (symbol group D) for which the variation time reduction number (electric support number) is set to “10000”, all the base suppression effects tables are selection candidates.

  In the present embodiment, by allocating the types of the base suppression effects table according to the relationship between the number of stays in each effect section and the number of times of variation time reduction (electric support times) assigned to each big hit type, the base suppression effects are assigned. There is no inconsistency between the result of the production and the transition result of the actual production mode. In the figure, for convenience, the numerical values to be provided for the lottery are omitted, but in actuality, the determination number (lottery random number value) for determining the type of the base suppression effect table according to the obtained random number random number value is shown. Is set, and the type of the base suppression effect table is determined based on which judgment number the lottery random number value belongs to.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the first to fourth performance sections, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the currently staying base (first base, second base, third base) , 4th base) to the central base. When the process shifts to the central base, a battle effect in which the ally character battles the enemy character (boss character) is performed. Then, in the battle effect, it is suggested that if the teammate character wins, the "special jackpot" is won, and if the teammate character loses, it is suggested that the "normal jackpot" is won. Note that this battle effect has basically the same configuration as the battle effect in the fantasy fight rush mode described above, and a detailed description thereof (such as the route of the battle effect) will be omitted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the predetermined value (remaining number of small fish characters) reaches the target value, success in branch branch effect (continuation of the electric support state or the number of electric support Although the predetermined number of times is determined in advance, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the predetermined value may be set to the target value in the production mode (production state) in which the current game state is concealed. A configuration may be adopted in which, upon reaching, the current gaming state is determined to be an advantageous gaming state (for example, a certain-variable gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a latently reliable gaming state).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the predetermined value (remaining number of small fish characters) is reduced each time the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The predetermined value may be increased each time the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Instead of the effect of subtracting the remaining number toward the target value of “0”, the target value is the number of destroyed small fish characters. It may be an effect mode in which addition is performed toward “1000”.

[Remaining number notification effect]
Next, the remaining number notification effect according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the remaining number notification effect and the mode branching effect. The remaining number notification effect is an effect of notifying the remaining number of times until the number of variable displays reaches the predetermined number of times in the variable display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the transition from the suppression mode to the special mode. In the present embodiment, “10 times” is set as the predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the fluctuation display of 10 rotations immediately after the shift to the special mode (during the fluctuation display from the first rotation to the 10th rotation), the remaining number of times until the fluctuation display number reaches the predetermined number (10 times) is notified. Is done.

  The remaining number of times is displayed on the screen in a countdown format, and is decremented by "1" each time the special symbol change display is performed once. Of the predetermined number of times (10 times) of the fluctuation display, the initial value of the remaining number of times notified in the first time fluctuation display (the first rotation change display) is “9”, and the last number of fluctuation display (the 10th rotation change display). The final value of the remaining number of times reported in (variation display of) is “0”. The update timing of the remaining number is set at the start of each variation display.

  Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode, the game state in this special mode is one of the normal game state and the latent game state, and in any game state, the electric chew support function is not provided. Since the player is not operating, it is difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state in the special mode, and the gaming state is kept secret. At this time, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of times of variable display reaches a predetermined number (10 times) without the occurrence of the next big hit in the special mode, the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state. If there is, the mode is shifted from the next variable display to the normal mode, and if the game state in the special mode is the latent game state, the special mode is continued even in the next variable display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the last variation display (variation display at the tenth rotation) of the variation display of the predetermined number of times (ten times), the normal display is performed after the variation display at the tenth rotation ends. Whether the game mode falls to the mode (whether the current game state is the normal game state) or whether the special mode is continued after the end of the fluctuation display of the tenth rotation (the current game state is the latent game state). Is performed, a mode branching effect is suggested.

[Mode branch production]
In the mode branching effect, whether or not the special mode is continued after the end of the variable display of the tenth rotation in the variable display of the tenth rotation immediately after the transition to the special mode, depending on the display mode of the background image on the screen, This is a production that suggests that the player will fall into the mode. The types of the mode branch effects are roughly classified into a mode continuation effect indicating that the special mode continues after the tenth rotation and a mode end effect indicating that the special mode ends at the tenth rotation. Is done. In the present embodiment, the background image (special background image) displayed in the special mode and the background image (normal background image) displayed in the normal mode are basically the same background image. . More specifically, the background image shown in FIG. 25 described above is displayed as the background image regardless of whether the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode or the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 25, the logo image 731, the ally icon 732, and the friend icons 733 to 735 are displayed on the background image in the normal mode or the special mode.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the logo icon 731 of the background image, a normal display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is “white” and a special display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is “rainbow” Is set. Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the logo icon 731 is always displayed in the normal display mode (white). On the other hand, when the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode, the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode (white) in the variable display of the first to ninth rotations immediately after the transition to the special mode. On the other hand, in the next variable display of the tenth rotation, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is different depending on the type of the mode branch effect. In other words, when the special mode ends with the variable display at the tenth rotation, during the execution of the variable display at the tenth rotation, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode as a mode end effect. When the special mode ends and the mode falls to the normal mode, the logo icon 731 maintains the normal display mode in the variable display of the normal mode. On the other hand, when the special mode continues even in the variable display after the tenth rotation, during the execution of the variable display at the tenth rotation, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in a special display mode as a mode continuation effect. When the special mode is continued, the display mode of the logo icon 731 in the variable display after the 11th rotation is maintained in the special display mode. In this manner, the mode branching effect is continued in the special mode after the variable display depending on whether the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode or the special display mode in the variable display of the tenth rotation. Or the possibility that the special mode will end with the variable display (fall to the normal mode).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 60, an example of the effect of the remaining number notification effect and the mode branching effect in the present embodiment will be described. Here, in FIG. 60, when the game state in the special mode is the normal game state, the effect proceeds in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) in the figure, and the game in the special mode is performed. When the state is the latent game state, the effect proceeds in the order of (1) → (2) → (5) → (6) in the figure.

  First, when the game state in the special mode is the normal game state, as shown in (1) in the figure, when the effect mode enters the special mode, “10 times” is displayed on the screen as the remaining number of the special mode. Is done. The logo icon 731 is displayed on the screen in a normal display mode (white).

  As shown in (2) in the figure, when the fluctuation display of the first rotation of the special mode is started, the remaining number of times of the special mode is reduced by one, and “9 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times. Thereafter, each time the variable display is started, the remaining mode display of the special mode is decremented by one. The logo icon 731 is continuously displayed on the screen in a normal display mode (white).

As shown in (3) in the figure, when the fluctuation display of the 10th rotation of the special mode (the last fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times) is started, “0” is displayed as the remaining number of times of the special mode, and , A mode end effect in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode is performed. By performing the mode end effect, it is suggested or notified to the player that the player will fall from the next fluctuation display to the normal mode (the current game state is the normal game state).

  As shown in (4) in the figure, when the effect mode falls from the special mode to the normal mode, the remaining number display disappears from the screen, and the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode as it is. Then, the normal mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

  On the other hand, when the game state in the special mode is the latent game state, as shown in (5) in the figure, the fluctuation display of the tenth rotation of the special mode (the fluctuation display of the final number of times in the special mode) is started. In addition, "0 times" is displayed as the remaining number of special modes, and a mode continuation effect in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in a special display mode (rainbow color) is performed. By performing this mode continuation effect, it is suggested or notified to the player that the special mode will be continued (the current game state is the latent game state) even in the subsequent fluctuation display.

As shown in (5) in the figure, when the eleventh rotation of the special mode is started (when the special mode is continued), the remaining number display of the special mode disappears from the screen, and the logo icon 731 is displayed in the special display mode as it is. Is displayed with. Then, the special mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

[Standby demonstration]
Next, a standby demonstration effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of the standby demonstration effect. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a standby demonstration effect for reproducing a moving image for demonstration on a screen ( A customer waiting demonstration) is executed. The predetermined conditions are (1) the effect mode is the normal mode, and (2) the interrupted state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or more. In addition, "the interruption state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more" means that, as described above, the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist continues for the predetermined time or more, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not performed. Means that the period lasts for a predetermined time or more, that the period during which the game ball does not enter or pass through all winning ports continues for a predetermined time or more, and that the period during which no game ball is fired lasts for a predetermined time or more, etc. I do. The condition for ending the standby demonstration effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted). Specifically, the game ball is transferred to the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52. , A special symbol change display is started, a special symbol operation pending ball is generated, a rotation operation of the firing handle 12 for firing a game ball is detected, and the like. . On the other hand, when a game ball enters (passes) to the operation gate 53, when a variation display of a normal symbol is started, or when an operation reserve ball of a normal symbol is generated, the game ball is transmitted to the general winning openings 61 to 64. In the case where the player enters the ball, the standby demonstration effect does not end. Further, on the standby demonstration screen, a cross-shaped switch (a cross key, a cross button, or the like, which is one of the effect buttons 15 and a switch different from the effect button used in the button effect (operation request effect)) is displayed. By performing the operation, the volume of the sound output from the gaming machine can be adjusted. In this case, even if an operation related to volume adjustment is performed, the standby demonstration screen does not end, and two screens can be displayed at the same time. Further, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the standby demonstration screen. The display priority may be displayed, that is, the relationship between the display priorities may be “volume adjustment screen> standby demonstration screen”. In addition, the volume may be adjusted even in a situation where the standby demonstration screen is not displayed, for example, the volume may be adjusted during the fluctuation display or during the execution of the special game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main control board 100 determines that the interrupted state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 100 transmits a standby demo command, and the production control board 200 The configuration was such that the standby demonstration effect was started in response to the reception, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The effect control board 200 determines that the interrupted state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or more (the main control board 100 (It is determined that no fluctuation start command has been received for a predetermined period of time or longer), and a standby demonstration effect may be started.

  In the present embodiment, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the effect modes in the normal game state (low probability low base state). However, even if the current game state is the normal game state, the current effect is When the mode is the special mode, the standby demonstration effect is not performed even if the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more. The reason is that when the current production mode is the special mode (the game state is the normal game state, the latent game state, or the concealment state), the interruption state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or more. This is because, when the stand-by demonstration effect is started as an opportunity, the occurrence of the stand-by demonstration effect allows the player to know that the current game state is the normal game state. In other words, after shifting to the special mode, the player intentionally interrupts the game, so that the current game state can be grasped by whether or not the standby demonstration effect starts after the elapse of the predetermined time. This is because the game can be continued in the certain game state, and the game can be ended in the normal game state. Therefore, when the effect mode in the normal game state is the normal mode, the standby demonstration effect is executed when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more, while the effect mode in the normal game state is the special mode. In some cases, a special mode in which the game progresses in a form that keeps the current game state concealed by not executing the stand-by demonstration effect (by ignoring the stand-by demonstration command) even if the pause state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more Can be sufficiently secured.

<Process on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the main control board 100 side includes a main control-side main process and a main control-side timer interrupt process.

《Main control side main processing》
62 to 63 are flowcharts showing the main control-side main processing of the main control board 100. In this main control-side main process, after a security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by a reset at the time of power-on, the program starts, and the processes after S1 are started.

  First, as initial settings required at power-on, a start address is set as an initial value of a stack area in a stack pointer (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing a start address of a program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in a built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is ON (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9 described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the information of the normal power-off is stored (S6).

If the power-off normal information is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. The sum becomes "0". In this way, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 to be described later in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, it requests an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off reset setting processing, the setting of the normal power-on information, the initial setting of various errors, and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to store that the power-on was performed correctly, to store the power-on normal data in the power-off information flag, and to initialize the information of the power-off occurrence, Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a request for transmission of an effect control command ("power-off return command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power-off return command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operation state of the special symbol, the number of times of probability fluctuation, the number of times of saving, the number of times of easy entry, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. It should be noted that the untransmitted command requests before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information of the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information of the number of operation-reserved balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, a return setting for returning the ordinary electric accessory 522 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second starting port 52 is opened) is performed (S17). Further, a return setting for returning the special electric auditors product 542 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the special winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operation state of the special symbol probability variation function when the power is turned off is set (S19). Note that the probability change flag is a flag (a flag indicating that the special symbol probability variation function is in operation) for setting an operation probability (high or low probability) of a special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, a clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of power interruption, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not power interruption has occurred (S23). If no power interruption has occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In the initial value random number update processing, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”.

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the above-described processing of prohibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt processing to the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to execute S21 to S25. The process up to is repeated. Then, when an interrupt request is issued in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is ON in S23, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26, and the following power-off process is executed.

  Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, a clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in a power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the information is not power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the routine goes to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, access prohibition is set in the RAM 103 (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control-side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. The timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 every fixed time (for example, 4 ms), and is executed in such a manner as to interrupt the main control side main process.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then an interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, a clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset timeout time, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watch dog timer is cleared and restarted before the timeout. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, an input process is executed (S53). In this input processing, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor , Radio wave sensors, and the like, read the input information, determine their states, and store the detected information.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number updating process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the value of the random number counter is incremented by one, and when the value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”. On the other hand, as for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In the initial value update type random number update processing, the random number per symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”. When the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number updating process is executed (S56). In the initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”.

  Next, a timer subtraction process is performed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are updated by subtraction. For example, the value of each timer is decremented by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. In the special symbol game timer, a specified fluctuation time is set at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and is decremented as the time elapses. In addition, if the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the small hit game is executed during the execution of the small hit game. The timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is interrupted.

  Next, a second startup port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the invalid winning period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as a result of the determination, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

  Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switches 611 and 641 in the input processing (S53) is used. Based on the result of the switch inspection of the game ball, based on the result, if it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch, the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180 And a transmission request of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a winning ball control process is executed (S60). In the prize ball control processing, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize monitoring processing. The communication inspection with the payout control board 400 is performed by monitoring the data received from the server.

  Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored. , The number of operation-reserved balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and a random number related to a normal symbol lottery is stored.

  Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In the normal symbol control process, a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 are performed. , A process during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, a process during the demonstration of ending the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like. In the normal symbol changing process, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) so that the normal symbol is displayed in a variable or fixed manner.

Next, a normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the change start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation reserved ball is digested, and the normal symbol is depleted. , Determination of symbols, determination of a variation pattern, setting of a variation time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, a starting port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In the starting port monitoring control process, the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect determination, command request for the number of symbols stored, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, a special symbol variation start process (S420), which will be described in detail later, and a special symbol variation process (S430) according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), A special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this processing, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, the setting of the start and end of the operation of the special electric auditors product 542 is performed as the operation process for the special electric auditors product 542. Updating of the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54, setting of the start of the operation of the probability changing function, setting of the start of the function of reducing the changing time, setting of the changing pattern selection state, and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (S67). In the special winning opening effective period setting process, the special winning period and the invalidation period of the special winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning opening 54 are set as a result of the determination.

  Next, a special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, if there is an operation reserved ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is decremented by one, a command request for the number of stored symbols, and determination of the special symbol hit / fail. The determination of the symbol of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration effect time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is performed (S69). In this abnormality detection processing, based on the input information in the input processing (S53), a magnetic detection signal from a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal from a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, and the like are sequentially inspected. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

  Next, a ball entry time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In the ball entry time abnormality detection processing, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the entry time transit time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error And an output request for a security signal to be output to an external terminal.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display processing, display data such as the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 operates continuously (the number of prescribed rounds), the number of operation-reserved balls in a normal symbol and a special symbol, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying information of the error state detected in the abnormality detection processing on the state indicator of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, an LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65) is performed in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, display the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, and display an error. The display data created in the abnormality detection processing (S69), the game state display processing (S71), etc., is transferred to each of the special symbol display devices 71, 72, the ordinary symbol display device 75, each of the special symbol holding lamps 73, 74, and the general symbol holding. Output is performed to the lamp 76, a status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display of these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is performed (S73). In this firing control signal output processing, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the firing of the game ball is permitted. I do. On the other hand, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the firing of the game ball.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric accessory 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) are performed. An excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643 based on the control data.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above-described process, and the effect control command is transmitted. The control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, an external information output process is executed (S76). In the external information output process, the game information relating to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal plate 600. As the external information signal, for example, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormal signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormal signal, an abnormal sensor detection (abnormal ball passing time abnormal signal) signal, a big hit signal, a signal during a continuous play, There is a symbol confirmation signal and the like.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control-side timer interrupt processing is completed, the process returns to the main control-side main processing, and the main control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power-off (a drop in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control-side main processing or the interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power-off confirmation flag is turned on. I do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-described power-off processing (S
26 to S32).

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

  First, a first starting port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a first starting port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, a second starting port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a second start-up winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Next, an operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 has been input. When the detection signal is input from the operation gate switch 531, the operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed the operation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and the operation gate winning is performed. A command is generated and temporarily stored in a command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the special winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 has been input. When the detection signal is input from the special winning opening switch 541, the special winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and Then, a special winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if the detection signal is not input from the special winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  Subsequently, a general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 611 and 641 have been input. When the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 611 and 641 are input, the general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 61 to 64 is stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 611, 641, the current winning monitoring process is ended.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start opening monitoring control processing (S64), the special symbol control processing (S65), the special electric accessory control processing (S66), the special symbol change start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Is applicable.

(Start port monitoring control processing)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the start-up port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a winning of a game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). If a winning in the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

If the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random number per symbol, and a special symbol are determined as random numbers for the first special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value and a special symbol variation addition pattern random number are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (S203). ). Then, as an update of the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is ended.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a winning of the game to the second starting port 52 has been detected (S205). When a winning in the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). If the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number value per special symbol, the random number value per special symbol, and the special symbol are selected as the random number values for the second special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value and a special symbol variation addition pattern random number are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (S207). ). Then, as an update of the operation reserved ball count of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is ended.

  Subsequently, whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. Is determined (S209). If the number of activated balls has been updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage means. 180 is stored in the command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a pre-determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determination timing (S211: YES), the special symbol perturbation is stored in a winning random number buffer (such as a reserved n storage area or a register) in order to generate pre-reading decision information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the starting opening. The numerical value is read out, and a prior / non-permission judgment is made (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-judgment command including the pre-judgment result information (pass / fail pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  In addition, a special symbol per symbol random number value is read from the winning symbol random number buffer, and a symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (symbol pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Furthermore, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and a variation pattern preliminary determination is performed (S216). Then, a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

  In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), a special symbol change start monitoring process, which will be described later, is performed on the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the change standby state, that is, whether both the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are “00H (change standby)”. It is determined whether or not it is (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of activated balls of the second special symbol is “0” (S303). If the number of retained balls is not “0” (S303: NO), the second special symbol is determined. Assuming that the symbol change start condition is satisfied, the address of the second special symbol change start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). Then, the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol. It is being digested. Details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is considered that the first special symbol change start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter the address) After setting the addresses of various tables and the RAM storage area used in the processing (S306), the process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  If both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change start conditions are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

  In the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the current change start is monitored with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed. However, since the processing method is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for the special case, the first special symbol side is processed. The processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is processing on the second special symbol side.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation-reserved balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the subtraction is generated, and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the special symbol side which is the target of the fluctuation start is accessed, and the random number per special symbol stored in the earliest holding storage area (hold 1 storage area) and the special symbol The symbol random number value, the special symbol variation pattern random value, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random value are sequentially read, and these random numbers are referred to as a special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), a symbol determination process (S330), and a variation pattern selection process. For use in (S423), it is transferred to a special symbol hit / fail judgment area, a special symbol pattern judgment area, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment area, and a special symbol fluctuation addition pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the reserved storage area, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area to the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reserved storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol hit / fail judgment process is executed (S320). In the special symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S320), first, a special symbol hit / no lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability changing state, a high-probability winning / decreasing lottery table is acquired. If the gaming state is the normal state, a low-probability winning / decreasing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / fail judgment area of the main information storage means 180. Then, referring to the special symbol win / fail lottery table, the special symbol win / fail determination is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. In addition, the values (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and out-of-match data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the hit determination are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, a symbol determination process is performed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), a stop symbol of the special symbol and a character effect number (variable added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit determination. Then, the stopped symbols (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined by the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special symbol on / off special symbol on / off / normal symbol on / off). / 4 patterns of normal pattern probable variation OFF). If the result of the determination is incorrect, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a loss (S342: NO), the flow proceeds to S351.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game ends, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. The probability change frequency is determined as the number of times the special symbol probability change function is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of the big hit winning, the number of times the special symbol changing time reducing function is activated after the end of the big hit game, Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning, the number of power support times is determined as the number of times the power chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed ( S347). The results of this determination (the number of times of change in probability, the number of times of change in the time of change, and the number of times of power support) are stored in the time saving number storage area and the number of power support times storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, an opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

  Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration effect time (hit start demonstration time and hit end demonstration time) of a special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / fail judgment area and the special symbol hit judgment area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S320) and the symbol judgment processing (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from “00H (waiting)” to “01H (change start)” (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric auditors' game status is “00H (hit waiting state)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric auditors product 542 is not operated (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not “00H (waiting)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the routine shifts to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (waiting)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The address of the various tables to be used and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-described S403 or S404 is used, and the special symbol to be changed this time is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed. However, since the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for the special case, is the processing on the first special symbol side? The processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is on the second special symbol side. Details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H") is executed. I do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not “00H” (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “01H (change start)” (S412). When the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol change start process (S420). Details of the special symbol change start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changing)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is “03H” (S414: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol stopped symbol displaying process (S440). The details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol change start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start process (S420).

  First, the main fluctuation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the special symbol win / fail determination and the fluctuation pattern selection state (S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and one of a plurality of types of main variation patterns is selected with reference to the main variation pattern table (S422).

Next, a main fluctuation addition table is acquired based on the main fluctuation pattern selected in S422 (S423). Subsequently, the special symbol variation addition pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area, and one of a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns is selected with reference to the main variation addition table (S424).

  Subsequently, a variation time (basic variation time + variation additional time) corresponding to the main variation pattern and the main variation additional pattern selected this time is set (S425). Then, as the setting of the special symbol change start, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S426), and a change start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S427). As the variation start command, a communication inspection command, a variation additional symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in order to start the symbol variation effect on the effect display device 70, and these are generated as main information storage means. 180 in the command storage area.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S428). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (change start)" to "02H (change start)" (S429).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the special symbol change processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change processing (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol change display (S431). In the display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated at every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) so that the special symbol is displayed in a variable or fixed manner.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended (S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), a special symbol stop symbol to be definitely displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Next, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to display the decorative symbol is displayed, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the final display time (S435). Note that the “determined display time” is a time period in which the stopped symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped changing. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during fluctuation)" to "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the special symbol confirmation display time has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from “03H (stop symbol is being displayed)” to “00H (standby)” (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the hit determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). If the hit determination data is the jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S444), the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, “00H (off)” is set to the probability change flag, and “00H” is set to the probability change number counter, the change time reduction number counter, and the easy ball entry number counter to clear to zero.

  Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demonstration command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of times of execution of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric auditors product game status transits from “00H (hit waiting state)” to “01H (special game)” (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the hit / fail judgment flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the hit determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the special symbol probability changing function is operating (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), the probability variation counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of the current special symbol variation count (Step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function is operating (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the consumption of the current special symbol variation count (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the variation time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is determined that the number of times of ending the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (S458). If the variation time reduction counter after the subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the electric tube support function is operating (S459). If the electric chew support function is being operated (S459: YES), the electric support counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of change of the number of times of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power support counter is zero (step S461). If the electric support frequency counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the number of times the easy entry state has been reached has been reached, and the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462). If the power support counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the routine goes to S463.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by one (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number. If it has reached, it switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). The effect control board 200 sets and updates the effect mode based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 74 to 75 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors game status is “01H (special game)” (S501). When the special electric auditors product game status is “01H” (S501: YES), a special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is operating (S502). When the special electric auditors product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric auditors product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric combination 542 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric combination 542 is started in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the main information storage means 180 as a command. It is stored in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric combination 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as a process during the operation of the special electric combination 542.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 54 by a specified count (maximum winning number) (S506), and the operation time of the special electric accessory 542 is determined. It is determined whether (open time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball has won the special winning opening 54 by the specified count (maximum winning number) (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), the special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached a predetermined specified round number (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 is incremented by one (S510).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the flow shifts to S511 to set an end demonstration display time as a special game hit end demonstration setting process. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

  Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction number counter (S512). In addition, the power support frequency counter set in S347 is stored in the power support frequency counter (S513).

  Subsequently, with reference to the contents of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probable symbol) (S514). If the condition device is activated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability variation function is started (S515). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated according to the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data “00H” is stored in the probability change frequency counter, and S515 is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S516). If it is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power support frequency information stored in the power support frequency counter is the power chew support function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S518). If the data is the electric-chu support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric-chu support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the normal symbol probability variation function (S519), the operation start of the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function (S520), and the start of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if the data is not the operation support function function data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the change pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). The effect control board 200 sets the effect mode after the special game based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric auditors product game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (hit waiting state)” (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the effect control board 200 includes a reset start process (including the effect control main process) executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, for example, after power-on, and an effect control timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, reception interrupt processing of an effect control command activated by a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and a ramp activated when a predetermined occurrence time specified in a time schedule of a variable effect pattern arrives It is configured to include an effect interruption process and a transmission interruption process of an image control command activated at regular intervals.

  Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating a priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur. In this example, “reset start processing by power reset: top priority”, “reset start processing by various abnormalities: top priority” → “production control command reception interrupt processing: level 7” → “WDT (runaway detection)” The priority levels are ranked in the order of “reset start processing: level 3” → “image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2” → “production control timer interrupt processing: level 1”. The “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” may be performed, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an invalid command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an invalid area or an invalid method, or when a DMA (Direct Memory) is used. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-described plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but other interrupt processing actually exists.

In the effect-control-side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting any of the interrupt prohibition states or the interrupt prohibition state other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control-side main process is in the interrupt permitting state, each interrupt process is started in such a manner that the main process is interrupted. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested during the execution of the interrupt process (multiple interrupts are generated), basically, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. In other words, each interrupt process is performed in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or lower interrupt levels are prohibited. Then, the process returns from each interrupt process to the effect control-side main process with all interrupts permitted. The priority (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the reset start processing of the effect control board 200. In the reset start processing, the sub-main CPU 201 is activated by one of a power-on reset, a reset caused by various abnormalities, and a reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required at power-on, a start address is set as an initial value of a stack area in a stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, a memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by clearing to 0 is performed for a variable without an initial value. In addition, the sub-main CPU 201 loads the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt processing are prohibited (S605). Next, a process of setting an error type to be made valid for the model, among various types of errors set in advance for each model, is performed (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made to turn all the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80) off (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S608).

  Subsequently, the main processing of the game effect is executed as a main process on the effect control side (S609). Details of the effect control-side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process goes to the production control side main process in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process. However, if the program returns to this process due to a bug in the program or the like, , A transition is made to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

《Direction control main processing》
Next, the production control side main processing (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the production control-side main processing (S609).

  First, in the effect control-side main processing, an address (a head address where the program is developed) to start checking whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (the activation of various types of interrupt processing is permitted) (S612).

Next, a device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting), and is used to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information necessary for the operation. At the end of the initialization operation, movable movable object 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, and the watchdog timer is set. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing to be described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and a plurality of (for example, four) monitorings are performed. , The signal level is “1 (H level)” when the input port states are all “1”, the signal level is “0 (L level)” when all are “0”, and the signal level is otherwise. No change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In the error effect management process, various devices start an error effect based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

  Subsequently, an effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In the effect button monitoring control process, when the button announcement effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 within a predetermined effective operation time is monitored, and information on the input state of the effect button 15 is obtained. Hold.

  Subsequently, a preliminary lottery management process is executed (S618). In the preview lottery management process, a preview effect pattern that defines the content of the preview effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern is set in accordance with the scenario of the variable effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260. At this time, if the accessory announcement effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). . In this example, instead of performing a lottery in one main loop process, all kinds of preview effects (notification effect patterns) occurring within one variation of the decorative pattern are improved in the main loop processing efficiency. In order to perform the lottery, the lottery is performed for a plurality of main loop processes separately for each generation time of the notice effect (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the announcement effect that occurs at the start stage of the decoration symbol change, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decoration symbol change (send the image control command immediately). It is supposed to do.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern ), Pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required for updating an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the present example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing processing when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, the control data (lamp data, drive data, and the like) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completely completed in the later-described effect control-side timer interrupt process, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable auditorium 24 is stopped. Then, the control of the target device ends.

  Subsequently, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. If the effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the read effect control command is read out. The effect control processing corresponding to the type of is performed. Details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) has been performed during the current loop processing (S621). In the case immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and shifts to the next loop process. On the other hand, if the command analysis has not been executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed until a predetermined time has elapsed (S622). In the present embodiment, “16 ms” which is a half of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the switching control of the lamp LP is set as the predetermined time. In the effect lottery random number update processing, various effect lottery random numbers such as a prefetching preview random number random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing (S622) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis processing (S622). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the change pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a pre-judgment command. If the hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this suspension information management processing (S634), the symbol storage number command or the preliminary determination command is read from the sub main information storage means 260, the pre-read determination is performed based on the information of the preliminary determination result, and the reserved image of the effect display device 70 is displayed. A process for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. If the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination processing (S636). In the variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is stopped for variation. If the command is a command, a process for terminating the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect related commands include a jackpot start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration effect command. If the big hit effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination processing (S638). In the jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. If the small hit effect-related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination processing (S640). In the small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S641). When the error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination processing (S642), the error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state by turning on the effect lamp LP or the sound of the speaker 11 is determined. .

  If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), nothing is done. Command analysis processing ends.

<< Processing control command reception interrupt processing >>
Next, the reception interruption processing of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an effect control command reception interrupt process. As described above, this effect control command reception interrupt process starts when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in the interrupt process. It has become. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, the MODE data is also referred to as a “first command” and the EVENT data is referred to as a “second command” for convenience of description.

First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice consecutively. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice consecutively.

  Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, an effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the acquisition timing of the production random number is set at the time of receiving the production control command, because the production control command is transmitted at physically irregular timing such as at the time of starting winning of the game ball or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, this is to prevent the acquisition timing from having a periodicity. By making the acquisition timing of the production random number random as described above, inconveniences such as the same production being repeatedly selected unnaturally in various production lotteries are less likely to occur.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no inconsistency in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (write pointer) is obtained (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis processing (S620) in the main processing, and the effect control processing corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Production control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the effect control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at a predetermined time interval, and is executed in a manner of interrupting the above-described effect control-side main process.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processes in and after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In the port input / output processing, input / output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 is performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output processing, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage means 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, a device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interruption cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, an effect timer updating process is executed (S914). In the effect timer updating process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are decremented and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuating time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the generation timing of the notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the drive timing of the movable role object 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective time of the operation of the effect button 15 is decremented and updated by an interruption period (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, a task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter updating process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated every time a timer interrupt occurs. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", the value is returned to "0". That is, the task counter can have a cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned in accordance with the value of the task counter updated this time, and a ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S917), runaway monitoring is performed according to the value of the task counter. Tasks (image CPU runaway monitoring processing in S9189) and error management tasks (error management timer update processing in S919) are executed. In this example, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at 8 ms intervals from each other) are used for runaway monitoring. One value is assigned to the task and another value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the circulation period of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Subsequently, a lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) and the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit for switching the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The output process of the lamp data is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit converts the ramp data in the transmission buffer into serial data in byte units and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, thereby outputting all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

  Subsequently, an image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In the image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Accordingly, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which the H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time.

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is decremented and updated. Then, after all interrupts are permitted and the contents of the saved registers are restored, the effect control-side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control command >>
Next, transmission interruption processing of an image control command will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the transmission interruption processing of the image control command. The image control command transmission interruption process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interruption process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is obtained in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command has not been stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit specified as the output destination (S935). Thereby, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is updated by incrementing it by one (S937). Then, the transmission interruption processing of the image control command is completed, and the processing returns to the original processing before the interruption.

  The main effects achieved in this embodiment are summarized as follows. First, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the amusement of a game by a new pseudo continuous production, which is not merely performing a plurality of pseudo fluctuation displays, and to specify a gaming machine specification other than the pseudo continuous production (pseudo continuous production). It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by a new effect different from the effect, a new effect display method and control method, a new game property, and the like.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a pre-production of the pseudo-reinforcement (true pseudo-reinforcement effect), the pseudo-reinforcement of fake (fake pseudo-reinforcement effect) is interrupted, and it is as if re-doing the pseudo-reinforcement. By making it look as if it was performed, it is possible to have a variety of variations in how to show the pseudo-tanning, so it is possible to create a complex and diverse game production (pseudo-tanning production) that has never existed before, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in a situation where a no-muscle connection state having two auras has occurred, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-linking is re-executed using the auras (that is, the no-muscle connection). Depending on whether the connected state can be maintained or not), the degree of expectation of succeeding in the pseudo pseudo-faning in the next pseudo-variation differs, and the player's interest is attracted to the pseudo-faning one by one. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonous nature of the pseudo-running, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, while making the production mode (companion participation production pattern) of each competitor participation production different, the same production result (the same number of participants or the same aura possession number) is eventually obtained. In such a case, it is possible to create an unprecedentedly complex and diverse game production by differentiating the jackpot expectation degree according to the production mode (companion participation production pattern) of each companion production production. In addition, it is possible to realize a game effect without causing the player to get bored, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, while the reach effect type or the number of pseudo-runs is specified by the main change pattern, the number of executions of each element effect is specified by the main change addition pattern, so that the main change pattern and the main Based on the combination with the variation adding pattern, while suppressing the data amount of the main control board, the types of the variation pattern are substantially increased to diversify the variation of the combination of the reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the element effect. Therefore, a more effective effect can be realized, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the display priority between the decorative symbol and the hold image is switched according to the operation state of the decorative symbol (variable display state / stop display state), and the display state is changed according to the game state. Since the higher priority image can be viewed by the player preferentially, the display effect of the decorative pattern and the display effect of the reserved image can coexist without obstructing each other's effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a common display mode (normal display mode / special display mode) is set between the reserved image and the changing image while the display sizes of the pending image and the changing image are different from each other to achieve clear differentiation. ) To provide a series of directing relationships and coordination from the occurrence of the hold until the digestion is completed (until the change display ends), so that the hold image and the changing image can be distinguished. It is possible to realize a game effect (holding change effect) with uniformity as a whole while clearly distinguishing it, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, while each suspended image is operated and displayed in an individual operation mode for each effect stage, the operation display of each suspended image is given a certain degree of regularity to provide a sense of unity of the operation display. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel reservation display effect that has never been seen before, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the course of a series of battle effects in which there is a certain degree of law between the match result and the game result of "special big hit" if the battle is won and "normal big hit" if the battle is lost By reflecting the operation of the player more flexibly in the battle effect and enhancing the effect of the battle effect and the player participation type effect, it is possible to create an unprecedented complex and diverse game effect, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a big hit (so-called accident hit) of the second special symbol occurs in the fluctuation display of the first rotation after the electric support is removed, the normal game is actually performed even if it is one rotation. Although the state of the jackpot is interrupted by falling to the state, the staging mode is maintained in the revenge mode corresponding to the time saving game state, and the jackpot information of the jackpot is continued as it is (the effect is simulated). ), The player can be made to recognize the player as if it were in a continuous state without reducing the player's willingness to play, The player does not feel uncomfortable with the special symbol jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and when the effect mode is the special mode, the standby demonstration effect (customer Even if the player intentionally interrupts the game and generates a standby state of the game by prohibiting the occurrence of the standby demonstration effect, the current game state (the normal game state) is determined based on whether or not the standby demonstration effect occurs. State and latent game state) can be prevented from being exposed in advance (the tipping), so that the fairness of the game can be secured, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. .

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the number of executions of a plurality of types of elemental effects (companion participation effect, aura-connected effect, and aura-use effect) is specified by one main change additional pattern, so that the symbol change effect (reach) is achieved. It is possible to carry out a wide variety of game effects while displaying the fluctuation of symbols while increasing the variation of the combination of each element effect added to the effect and pseudo-sequence effect while suppressing the data amount (memory capacity) of the main control board. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns corresponding to one main fluctuation addition pattern are provided, and the sub-variation addition patterns are determined based on the number of executions of each element effect specified by one main fluctuation addition pattern. Since the execution timing of each element effect can be different for each variation addition pattern, a variety of game effects can be performed during the variation display of the symbols while suppressing the data amount (memory capacity) of the main control board. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of each element effect from being monotonous, and to enhance the effect of the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when selecting a sub-variation addition pattern obtained by sub-developing the same main variation addition pattern, a selection candidate of the sub-variation addition pattern is selected according to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern linked to the sub-variation addition pattern. By making them different, it is possible to realize a wide variety of variable effects while suppressing the data amount (storage capacity) of the main control board, and execute each element effect for each scenario of the variable effects specified by the sub-variation pattern. By making the timing different, the effect of the special effect can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the special production and the reach production mutually related production contents, the whole production becomes unified and attracts the player's interest to the special production contents (the number of participants in the war) As a result, the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the reach effect can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, while the base suppression effect table is assigned in accordance with the type of jackpot (number of electric support provided) which is a trigger for shifting to the current suppression chance mode, the base suppression effect table is assigned to the base suppression effect table. The progress pattern for each variation display is specified, and the subtraction value or the addition value is determined almost randomly within the range that does not exceed the upper limit for each progress pattern, so that randomness that does not tire the player It is possible to create a variety of game productions with high variations, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration. Are omitted, and different portions will be mainly described.

<Common Modification Example 1>
In the above-described embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit, a normal positive change gaming machine that determines whether or not there is a positive change based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is employed. The present invention is not limited to this. If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a probable change according to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. Probably changing gaming machines may be employed. Further, as a modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a certain-variable gaming state which is given when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, with the limit number (upper limit number) set in advance as a limit. Alternatively, a gaming machine provided with a limiter function for limiting the number of continuous latent probability changing gaming states may be employed. Also, in the above embodiment, the special symbol probability variation function is configured as a normal probability changing machine that continues from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. (For example, 100 times) It may be configured as a number-of-turns-variable machine that operates continuously.

<Common Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, a model equipped with only one big winning port in the gaming area has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a model equipped with a plurality of large winning ports in the gaming area is applied. You may. When a model equipped with a plurality of special winning openings is employed, a specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area) serving as an activation trigger of a special symbol probability variation function is provided as the above-described V-variable gaming machine. Two or more large winning ports, a first large winning port and a second large winning port not provided with the specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area), may be mounted. As an example of the board layout, a first special winning opening and a second special winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially side by side in the right region of the game area, or the first special winning opening may be arranged. The board area to be played may be different from the board area in which the second special winning opening is arranged. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the first special winning opening (the number of unit prize balls) and the payout when the game ball enters the second special winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) may be the same or different. Of the two special winning openings, the first special winning opening (or the second special winning opening) is used for the small winning game, and the second special winning opening (or the first special winning opening) is used for the big winning game. May be configured as a special winning opening. In such a case, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big winning port for the small hit game is 10 pieces, and the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big winning port for the big hit game is 15 pieces. Good.

<Common Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, a latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are not activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The latent probability changing game state is defined as a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. Is also good. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is divided into a first special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and a second special symbol fluctuation time reduction function, so that the latent probable change game state can be changed to the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the second special symbol probability fluctuation function. (2) The game state may be defined as a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, the electric tuner support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), but also the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time). It may operate independently of the shortening function).

  Next, in order to make it easier to grasp the technical significance of the present embodiment and the modified example more clearly, problems corresponding to the above-described embodiment and the modified example will be outlined.

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to execute a so-called pseudo continuous effect, in which a single fluctuating display of a decorative symbol that shows the result of a pass / fail determination in a staging manner is displayed as a plurality of pseudo fluctuating displays. (See, for example, JP-A-2011-50700).

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, prior to the execution of the success / failure determination, a preliminary determination is performed on the unexercised operation-holding ball, a reserve image based on the result of the preliminary determination is displayed, and the display mode of the reserve image is determined. A so-called hold change effect that indicates a possibility of a big hit is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-213021).

  In conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern is in a so-called reach state, for example, it is developed into a reach effect such as a battle effect, and the type of big hit etc. is determined according to the result of the reach effect. What is suggested is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2012-85669).

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to have a plurality of effect modes and execute a variable effect of a decorative pattern based on a background image according to the type of the effect mode currently being executed (for example, See "JP-A-2015-54122").

  A pachinko gaming machine of a conventional model is known that executes a demonstration effect for customer waiting (a so-called standby demonstration effect) when a game standby state continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). No. 111115).

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to have a large number of fluctuation patterns in order to increase variations such as reach production and pseudo-continuous production (see, for example, JP-A-2003-230714). ).

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines, in conjunction with the fancy display of the decorative pattern, perform a reach effect or a notice effect, etc., that suggests a high degree of expectation of transition to special games (big hit expectation) in advance. It is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16106).

  However, since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, in order to differentiate from the conventional models, further improvement in the amusement of the game is required. .

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machines according to the above-described embodiment and the modified example adopt the above-described configuration and achieve the above-described effects in order to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be appropriately improved without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the components described in the above embodiments and modifications are appropriately combined, or some of the components described in the above embodiments and modifications are partially deleted or converted by well-known / common techniques. Those that are included are also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko gaming machine PA Gaming area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Rendering button 20 Gaming board 51 First starting port 52 Second starting port 53 Operation gate 54 Big winning opening 70 Rendering display 71 First special symbol display device 72 second special symbol display device 100 main control board 200 effect control board 220 effect control means 300 image control board 400 payout control board 500 power supply board 600 external information terminal board 511 first start port switch 521 second Starting port switch 541 Big winning port switch 710 Reservation image display area 720 Moving image display area

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed,
A starting port provided in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a predetermined random value in response to the entry of a game ball into the starting port,
Applicability judgment means for executing an applicability judgment based on the applicability random number value of the predetermined random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means,
A variation pattern determination unit that performs a main variation pattern lottery to determine a main variation pattern based on a main variation pattern random number value of the predetermined random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit,
Based on the main fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, a special symbol indicating the result of the determination of success or failure, a symbol display device is displayed in a variable display and stop display,
A special game execution means capable of shifting to a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the hit determination is a big hit;
An effect display device on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
Effect rendering means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device,
Based on the main variation addition pattern random number value of the predetermined random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means, perform a main variation addition pattern lottery to determine a main variation addition pattern,
The main fluctuation pattern specifies the basic fluctuation time of the special symbol,
The fluctuation addition time of the special symbol is specified by the main fluctuation addition pattern,
The fluctuation display time of the special symbol is configured to be able to be a sum of a basic fluctuation time of the special symbol specified by a main fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation addition time of the special symbol specified by a main fluctuation addition pattern. Yes,
A plurality of types of reach effect selection candidates are associated with the predetermined main fluctuation pattern,
According to the type of the main variation addition pattern, any one of the special effects having a plurality of types of display mode is configured to be executed,
A pachinko gaming machine, which is configured to be able to execute a reach effect corresponding to a display mode of a special effect.

Images